Home
        TLS-5000 TLS-6000 TLS-8000 Technical Service Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                        Side View    Shuttle Assembly             Front View  Midplate  Guide Shafts    Figure 7 82 Two Views of Shuttle Assembly Removal from TLS    7 22 2 Shuttle Assembly Replacement    NOTE    TLS 58xxx models will only function correctly with 500189 03 0 Revision B  or later  Shuttle As     semblies  Read the Shuttle Assembly Label  see Figure 7 83  and look for the text     Shuttle  B    or  later        1  Hold the Shuttle Assembly in a vertical position with the circuit boards and wir   ing facing inward and insert it through the front of the TLS  When clear of the  support member and guide shafts  rotate the Shuttle Assembly 90 degrees to  horizontal  Figure 7 82   Note that when oriented correctly the motor will be fac   ing the left side of the TLS     2  Rotate the Shuttle Assembly downward to clear the support member and guide  shafts while positioning it under the Midplate  Align the Shuttle Assembly with  the mounting screw holes in the bottom of the Midplate  Figure 7 80      3  While supporting the Shuttle Assembly with one hand  replace the two mounting  screws  which are accessible from the top of the Midplate  Figure 7 80      7 106 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    4  Replace the four remaining mounting screws  which are accessible from under   neath the Midplate  Figure 7 80      5  Reach into the through the right side Access Panel opening and reconnect the  r
2.                                            Shuttle Mechanism    e Drives  8     _     Tape Drives  Power Supplies  2                                                 Tape Drives  Power Supplies  2                                                                                                                 J             Y Clear Emitter Assembly  4       Blower PCBA    Vertical  Y  Axis  Home be probe  2     Figure 2 7 Dual Bay TLS Front View    Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    Y Clear Detector  2     Spring Cup Assembly  and Plastic Washer  2        Y Clear Detector PCBA    I O Port Assembly    _    Handler Power Supply  2           Control Panel    __ Hi                  Front     __  Guide Shaft  2           Carriage  Handler  Gripper    7     and Barcode Reader  2        Supporting  Guide Shaft  2     Carousel PCBA  2     a       ee Carousel  2        __    Executive PCBA  2           Carousel Motor  2                             se SCSI Connectors          Shuttle Assembly    Vertical  Y  Axis       7    T  Lead Screw  2        Rear Guide Shaft  2            Power Switch             Tape Drive PCBA  4                                                     Fuse  e            Blower                           AC Power Receptacle          Front    Vertical  Y  Axis  Home Sensor Probe  2     Rear  Tape Drives  8  Maximum    Tape Drive Power Supplies  4     Y Clear Emitter Assembly  4     Figure 2 8 Dual Bay TLS Side View    501090 Rev  F    Description and The
3.                                Power Switch                   ee    Tape Drive        Power Supply                      Fuse                ont    i            AC Power  Receptacle          Drive Bay PCBA    Figure 2 3 Single Bay TLS Rear View    2 8 Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    Handler Power Supply        a    I O Port Front Opening as  TF      _    Control Panel    Carousel a en ae l a  O wz  E    j    jh __ Carriage  Handler   on     Gripper and    CON Barcode Reader                                                                                     aa Front Guide Shaft                      Carousel PCBA          _ 4 0    ae Carousel Motor  Tape Drives  lt i                                                                Tape Drive  Power Supply                                  Cooling Fans                                     z  Y Clear Vertical  Y  Axis  Emitter Assembly Home Sensor Probe    Figure 2 4 Single Bay TLS Front View    501090 Rev  F Description and Theory of Operation 2 9    Y Clear Detector PCBA    Y Clear Detector I O Port Assembly  Spring Cup Assembly Handler Power Supply  and Plastic Washer Pe  m                                             Control Panel RA             a       Front Guide Shaft    _          f        Executive PCBA  Carriage     ___    Handler  Gripper and  Barcode Reader       Carousel PCBA          Vertical  Y  Axis          Ty  Lead Screw                io Carousel Motor                         E7 SCSI Connectors  
4.           Barcode Reader  Mounting Plate                                     E D x p  w          Barcode Reader Cable                TLS 6000  amp  68xxx    Barcode Reader  TLS 5000  amp  58xxx Mounting Screws  2     TLS 8000  amp  88xxx  Barcode Reader Barcode Reader     Handler Bottom View  Mounting Screws  2     Figure 7 15 Barcode Reader    7 22 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 7 1 Barcode Reader Removal    Refer to Figure 7 15     1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Open the cabinet door     It may be necessary to manually lower or raise the Carriage Assembly  so that it  is approximately in the middle of its vertical range of motion  Grasp the Carriage  Assembly and gently lift it up  or push it down     Unplug the Barcode Reader Cable from the back of the Barcode Reader     Place your hand under the Barcode Reader  Remove all three Barcode Reader  mounting plate screws using a number 1 Phillips screwdriver     Remove the Barcode Reader and its mounting plate from the TLS     From the top side of the Barcode Reader mounting plate use a number 2 Phillips  screwdriver to remove both Barcode Reader mounting screws  than separate the  Barcode Reader from the mounting plate     7 7 2 Barcode Reader Replacement    Refer to Figure 7 15     This procedure assumes that the barcode reader was removed in Section 7 7 1     1     501090 Rev  F    Align the Barcode Reader mounting plate over the Barcode Reader  with the  mounting screw ho
5.           The items in this menu are used to create custom default data for various menu sys   tem items     Example 1  The default text used on line 1 of the main operating display for a TLS   8000 is Qualstar TLS   8466  However  an operator can enter custom data  e g   dif   ferent text  for the main display line 1 over the SCSI bus  or by using the  Configuration Advanced Control Panel Display menu  If either of       these methods is used  and the operator then executes the Configuration menu   s    501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 15    5 4 9    5 16          SET TO DEFAULTS command  the custom text data is lost and the system   s default  text  Qualstar TLS    8466  is displayed again           Example 2  The Private Defaults LCD Line 1 menu item  and its sub items  1 10 and 11 20  can also be used to change the text used on line 1 of the main dis   play  Unlike Example 1  text data entered in the Private Defaults menu be   comes the new system default data  Therefore  the custom data entered in this menu  is also used as the system   s default data when an operator executes the Configuration  menu   s SET TO DEFAULTS command                 e SCSI Vndr  Allows for vendors or resellers name to be entered which will replace the system   s  default menu display text  Qualstar      e SCSI Prod  Allows for vendors or resellers product name to be entered  which will replace the  system   s default menu display text  TLS 8466      e SCSI Revision  Allows for vendors or resel
6.         Back Foward Home Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discuss Messenger  Address     http   10 10 10 10 main cai 7   Go   Links   Best ofthe Web    Channel Guide         Private Firmware UploadiLibrary                                         PositionHandler   l Browse        Sequential     Unload Drive Upload Library Firmware     amp  Support   9  Qualstar Support Choose Browse to select a firmware file to upload or type the name of the file  S Private Press enter or select Upload Firmware to begin upload    amp  Upload Firmware   9  QLink     Library  e Calibration  amp  Firmware Updates o    Sa Eie Edt Vew Go Favoies Hep  a Di i e    u  amp   amp          Display Locations Beck Foe Up  MapDrive Disconnect Cut  2 Display Positions Address  Sy C  WINDOWS  Desktop Fimmare Updates z   19  Display Sensors    9  Drive Bay  a  7001154 219   516KB 219 File  19  Executive  a  700131 000 006 018 484KB 018 File     Email     Magazine      Passwords  al    gt   Bowe oa  a tern    Figure 8 2 Sample of the Library Firmware Upload Screen    501090 Rev  F Firmware Updating 8 5    1  Access the firmware file by either clicking on the Browse button or typing the file  path to the firmware file     2  Press the enter key or click on the Upload Firmware button to begin the upload   ing process     3  Note that after the upload begins browsing to another page will stop the firm   ware uploading process     4  Two different screens will appear as the uploading process proceeds 
7.      5 28 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    6  Troubleshooting    After a Tape Library System  TLS  is serviced in the field  there are three types of  failures that might occur when power is reapplied  Power Up and Initialization  Op   eration  or Calibration  This chapter lists the possible failures that might occur in  each category and also the possible causes for each type of problem  Should a problem  occur after the TLS is serviced  use this chapter to quickly identify and remedy the  problem     NOTE    Important  Some problems will result in an alert message on the LCD display  followed by a ten     digit number  Our technical support department will need this number to diagnose the problem  if you contact them  So always  record this number  along with the general context of the problem        Troubleshooting Index          No motion occurs  the control panel display does not light up and the machine       makes a regular  clicking SOUNG            ccc ccccececeeseeeecseteeesesesesesesesesesessseseseseeeseeeeeees 6 1 1  No motion occurs  the control panel display does not light up and the machine   TS QUIS E EE sea ahaa das cand sedtobovddv Gaus A AE 6 1 2  The control panel display lights up but does not show text and nothing moveg            6 1 3  The control panel display lights up and shows text  no errors are displayed    but nothiie  MOVES      2 22sisesedecussideleg ees iP ea thede cess Nios iw ooh 8a eedoea ees ds 6 1 4  The Handlers move normally  but the 
8.     holding the Y Clear Detector Cable in place on top of the TLS  Move the cable  out of the way of the power supply  See  Figure 7 37      6  Remove all four Protective Screen mounting screws  then lift the Protective  Screen off of the TLS  Figure 7 38      7  Disconnect the Power Cable and 2 Wire Cable connector from the Power Supply  PCBA  Figure 7 38   For 500826 05 2 models only use a Phillips or flat screw   driver to remove the two power cable ring lug screws and lift the wires clear of  the Power Cable connector   s terminals     8  Remove all four power supply mounting screws  Figure 7 38   When removing    the left side screws  take care not to lose the cable clips     9  Lift the power supply up and out of the TLS     IOPORT Connector           Mounting    fgg Rear Service Panel Y    Screws  6                 FRONT ea     Executive PCBA   Access needed when  working with right side   Handler Power Supply     Figure 7 36 TLS Rear View    7 52                               E                         DO                                  oO             Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     501090 Rev  F    Front                      a N S  Switch Bracket       ____   FRONT  Cable  O  a  Ad OY  oe  O Port Cable    s lt                                          Right Side         Handler Power Supply     MMD AM all we  Left Side      Handler Power Supply Y Clear Detector Clips  PCBA Cable                            Figure 7 37 Top View of Handler Power Supplies  As seen fro
9.    2  Remove top panel    3  Remove side external panels     4  Remove internal subassemblies     Items recyclable using conventional methods    e Aluminum  Door  exterior panels  frame  robotics   e Stainless steel  Robot guides   e Steel  Some frames  fasteners   e Plastic  Window  cartridge magazines  tape cassettes  e Copper  Internal wiring  motors  SCSI cables    e Paper  Manuals    Items requiring special disposal due to lead based solder    e Printed Circuit Boards  Controller  miscellaneous small printed circuit  boards    Items that may have salvage or resale value    e Tape drives    e EMI line power filter    Reduction of Hazardous Substances  ROHS     Qualstar is committed to the implementation of RoHS  Restriction of the use of cer   tain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment  in accordance with    the European Directive  The effectivity date for compliance is July 1  2006  at which  time Qualstar will certify that its Tape Library products are compliant with the RoHS  standard  With the exception of Lead Based Solder  Qualstar will certify that its  products are free of all other substances listed in the Directive     Qualstar Tape Libraries fall under the category of    Information Technology Storage  Array Systems    for which the RoHS Directive provides for a lead solder exemption un   til the year 2010  Insofar as lead free solders are new to the electronics industry and  no quality or reliability data is available  Qualstar will invok
10.    ISHome   Locked     Open      ScsiDF    Shunt1l     Shunt2   XIndex   YHome   ZHome        OOOO O O O  OOO          In a dual bay library the Display Sensors status screen initially displays the current  logical state  1 or 0  of the control inputs for the right side  The left side logical states  are visible by selecting   LEFT and pressing the ENTER key  Single bay libraries will       simply display the logical states information     e     Adapt  A 0 indicates that a adapter is installed on the Executive PCBA   e ISHome  I O Port or Shuttle Home     On the right side  a 1 indicates the I O port carrier is fully retracted  On the left  side  a 1 indicates the Shuttle is home  left position     e Locked  A 1 indicates that the front door is locked  an optional feature      e  Open  A 1 indicates that the front door is closed     e  ScsiDF  A 0 indicates that a SCSI HVD differential adapter is installed on the Executive  PCBA    e  Shunt1    The  Shunt1 value is not currently used on TLS 5000 6000 8000 libraries     e  Shunt2  The  Shunt2 value is not currently used on TLS 5000 6000 8000 libraries     e XIndex  A 1 indicates that the Carousel Position sensor sees an indexing slot in the gear  guard skirt     e YHome  A 1 indicates that the Carriage is at its home position  bottom of its travel range      e ZHome  A 1 indicates that the Handler s Gripper is at its home position  fully retracted      501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 21    5 4 14 The Private DriveBay Menu    
11.    Reconnect the Power Cable and 2 Wire Cable connectors to the Power Supply  PCBA     Place the Protective Screen on top of the Power Supply  then install all four  Screen mounting screws  Make sure that neither power cable is pinched by the  Screen     Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 15 Tape Drive Power Supply    DANGER    TO AVOID THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY  ALWAYS WAIT ABOUT ONE  MINUTE AFTER THE POWER IS TURNED OFF AND THE POWER CORD IS    DISCONNECTED  BEFORE TOUCHING THE HANDLER POWER SUPPLY OR THE  TAPE DRIVE POWER SUPPLY        GEFAHR    UM VERLETZUNGEN ZU VERHINDERN WARTEN SIE BITTE 1 MINUTE  NACHDEM SIE DEN STROM AUSGESCHALTET HABEN UND DAS STROMKABEL  ENTFERNT HABEN  BEVOR SIE DAS HANDLER NETZTEIL SOWIE DAS TAPE   DRIVE NETZTEIL BERUEHREN        NOTE    To determine which model of Tape Drive power supply is installed in the library  remove the top  and left or right side panels then read the Tape Drive Power Supply Label located on the power    supply  See Figure 7 41  The label will read 500826 xx x  Make sure that the replacement power  supply has the same part number  or its equivalent  as the one that is to be removed        Please contact Technical Support for Tape Drive Power Supply part numbers    Single bay libraries contain one or two Tape Drive Power Supplies  The 6110  8111   62xx and 82xx models contain a single supply and the 54xx  64xx and 84xx models use  two supplies     The 58xxx  68xx
12.    Replace the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4      Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 13 3 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Removal    54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx Models    7 48    NOTE    To determine which model of Handler power supply is installed in the library  remove the top  panel then read the Handler Power Supply Label located on the power supply  See Figure 7 35     The label will read 500826 xx x  Make sure that the replacement power supply has the same  part number  or its equivalent  as the one that is to be removed        Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      Use a Number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Rear Service Panel  mounting screws  Figure 7 34   then remove the Rear Service Panel     Disconnect the Switch Bracket  Front  Cable and the I O port cable from the Ex   ecutive PCBA  Figure 7 34  then lift the cables out through the openings in the  top of the TLS  Figure 7 35      Remove all four Protective Screen mounting screws  then lift the Protective  Screen off of the TLS  Figure 7 35      Disconnect the Power Cable and the 2 Wire Cable connectors from the Power  Supply PCBA  Figure 7 35   For 500826 05 2 models only use a Phillips or flat  screwdriver to remove the two power cable ring lug screws and lift the wires  clear of the power cable connector   s terminals     Remove all four Power Supply mounting screws  Figure 7 35      Lift the Power Supply up and out of the TLS     F
13.    enter the Configuration menu  Record all of the custom configuration set        tings  in all of the sub   menus  except for the Log and Emulation sub     menus  This custom configuration information must be re entered after the  new Executive board is installed  Section 7 16 3         1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Rear Service Panel mount   ing screws  then remove the Rear Service Panel  Figure 7 44      3  Disconnect all of the cable connectors from the Executive PCBA   There are at  least 7 cables  The 12V FANS  CAROSL  Carousel   RS485A  RS485B  RS485I   SERLA  SERLB and Serial cables are model   dependent optional cables      4  Ifa HVD Adapter PCBA is mounted on the Executive PCBA  follow the proce   dure in Section 7 20 to remove it and mount it onto the replacement Executive  PCBA  Figure 7 77      5  On dual bay libraries only  remove and save the jumpers from the pins at SA1  and SA2  side specific   They will need to be attached to the replacement Execu   tive PCBA  On the left side Executive PCBA a jumper is attached to SA1  On the  right side Executive PCBA jumpers are attached to both SA1 and SA2     6  Remove all four Phillips mounting screws from the Heat Sink Flanges     NOTE    In the next step  the spacers behind the Executive PCBA come loose when the PCBA mounting    nuts are removed        Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7  Usea 1 4 inch nutdriver  a ma
14.   04 33          CICIO       4  gt   El Done          eg Intemet       Figure 8 4 Sample of the Library Firmware Upload Progress Screen    8 6 Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    4 Q Link   Microsoft Internet Explorer                      File Edt View Favorites Tools Help p i Ea  ae B 9 4 2 93 8 8  B 2    Back Stop Refresh Home   Search Favorites Media Histo Mal Print    Edt Discuss Messenger    _ E     Go   Links   Bestof the Web     Channel Guide 3          Private Firmware Upload Library           Position Handler   l  Sequential  Unload Drive      Support The library is now being reprogrammed    9  Qualstar Support   amp  Private   amp  Upload Firmware 00 45   9  QLink     Library  Calibration  Configuration  Display A D  Display Locations  Display Positions  Display Sensors  Drive Bay  Executive  Email  Magazine  Passwords           8 Ie     This process will take about 1 minute        COCO CROCE ORC OE    X       EL fh  m n a         Intemet          Figure 8 5 Sample of the Library Firmware Reprogramming Progress Screen    8 4 Firmware Update via Q Conn    The user   s host computer and the TLS are connected together using a NULL modem  serial cable  This cable must have female DB 9 connectors at each end and wiring    such that pins 2 and 3 are crossed over and pins 5 are connected to each other at both  ends  See    User   s Qualstar  Host TLS  Computer Library    RS 232 Serial Cable       Figure 8 6 Host Computer Connected to TLS    501090 Rev  F Firmware Updating 8
15.   7 82 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Top of Drive Bay PCBA Top of Drive Bay PCBA       oogao  oo000          IC Removed        IC Installed      EE CO     Jumper Removed z  at SCL                                  Jumpers Removed       Ex    Jumper Installed                         at SDA   Oo   o   o   2 g B   o   o   EE  33338   58xxx 68xxx 88xxx Upper Bay PCBA 58xxx 68xxx 88xxx Lower Bay PCBA   P N 501257 03 4   P N 501257 02 6     Figure 7 63 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Model Drive Bay PCBA Jumper and IC Configuration    2  Replace any spacers that came loose from the mounting studs of the Bracket     3  Align the Drive Bay PCBA mounting screw holes with the mounting studs of the  Bracket     4  Install a washer onto a mounting stud  then with a 1 4 inch nutdriver thread a  PCBA mounting nut onto the mounting stud  Install the remaining PCBA  Mounting screws the same way  Figure 7 62      5  Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through one of the openings in the  right side of the TLS    frame  Maneuver the tape drive connectors on the PCBA so  they are facing out the drive bay openings  Figure 7 64   Align the Brackets  three holes with the corresponding threaded holes in the TLS     NOTE    In the next step  only finger tighten the screws  The Bracket needs to be loosely held to the    frame of the TLS        501090 Rev  F    6  Insert a Drive Bay Bracket screw through a hole in the bracket  Thread the  screw into the TLS finger tight  Install the rema
16.   Blower    Calibration   l   cartridge location  Calibration Left   d   decimal number  Calibration Right   x   hexadecimal number CALIBRATE       alphanumeric character  Carousel  CLEAR ACCESS   Configuration     Display A D   Display Locations   Display Positions   Display Sensors   DriveBay   Executive   RESET SCSI BUS                                            Note that the bold menu items are model dependent        A f    z Private        Blower  Libraries with single bays have a single SCSI ID sub menu Address  xx  Type  ddd    while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models   in   stead have SCSI ID LEFT and SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus     Revision  ddd  Updates   dddddddddd  Oper Properly  YES                            Up To Speed  YES  Speed  ddd   P   Calibration Left Private   Calibration Volts 24  ddd  Calibrated  NO P  Calibration Right  Valid  NO Calibrated  NO  CRTPRS Thrs ddddd Valid  NO  YCLEAR Thrs ddddd CRTPRS Thrs ddddd  YCLEARM Thrs ddddd I OCLR Thrs ddddd  Y DATA 0   ddddd I OFULL Thrs ddddd  Y DRIVE Ofst0  ddd YCLEAR Thrs ddddd Private      Carousel  Y DRIVE Ofst1  ddd YCLEARM Thrs ddddd Current Stop  d  Y DRIVE Ofst2  ddd Y DATA 0   ddddd Demand Stop  d  Y DRIVE Ofst3  ddd Y DRIVE Ofst0  ddd ABORT SLEW  Y FIXED 0   ddddd Y DRIVE Ofstl  ddd SLEW  Y FIXED 1   ddddd Y DRIVE Ofst2  ddd Current Pos tddddd  Y SHUTTLE   ddddd Y DRIVE Ofst3  ddd Index  BLOCKED  Y STORY 0   ddddd Y FIXED 0   ddddd STEP DOWN   Y FIXED 1   ddddd STEP UP   Y I O PORT   dddd
17.   Display Left Initiator 1 Part Number 700105  Right   Display Right Initiator 2 Revision  d dd Aborts  dddddddddd  BDC  OFF Initiator 3 Checksum  XXXX DoorOpn   dddddddddd  Clean  OFF Initiator 4 Exchang   dddddddddd  Configuration  OFF Initiator 5 Filter  dddddddddd  DriveBay  OFF Initiator 6 Grips  dddddddddd  Executive  OFF Initiator 7 I Calls dddddddddd  FC Events  OFF Initiator 8 I Moves  dddddddddd  FC Replies  OFF Initiator 9 I Steps  dddddddddd  FC States  OFF Initiator 10 Minutes   dddddddddd  I2c  OFF Initiator 11 Moves  dddddddddd  Inventory  OFF Initiator 12 Picks  dddddddddd  Ioport  OFF Initiator 13 Places  dddddddddd  RBT Actions  OFF Initiator 14 PowerOn   dddddddddd  RBT Client  OFF Initiator 15 Resets  dddddddddd  RBT Events  OFF Initiator LO Cmnds   dddddddddd  RBT I O Port  OFF Initiator L1 Moves   dddddddddd  RBT Machines  OFF Initiator L2 Steps   dddddddddd  RBT Operations OFF Initiator L3 Moves   dddddddddd  RBT States  OFF Initiator L4 Steps   dddddddddd  SCSI Commands  ON Initiator L5 Moves   dddddddddd  SCSI Interrupt OFF Initiator L6 Steps   dddddddddd  SCSI Phases  OFF Initiator L7  SCSI States  OFF Initiator L8  Sequential  OFF Initiator LO   fF     l TEANA RA sr ses  CLEAR Initiator L10 Grips  dddddddddd  LOCK Initiator L11 Picks  dddddddddd  UNLOCK Initiator L12 Places  dddddddddd  Initiator L13 X Moves   dddddddddd  Initiator L14 X Steps  dddddddddd  MDL Display    Entry Initiator L15 Y Moves   dddddddddd  MDLD  Left eee Entry Initiator RO Y S
18.   FRUs  501090 Rev  F    NOTE    Make sure that the Power Supply is turned so that the connectors on its PCBA are facing the    right side of the library  on the 62xx and 82xx series libraries   or facing the left side of the library   on the 54xx  64xx and 84xx series libraries   as seen from the rear of the TLS  Figure 7 35         2  Install all four Power Supply mounting screws  Figure 7 35      3  Reconnect the Power Cable and 2 Wire Cable connectors to the Power Supply  PCBA  Figure 7 35   For 500826 05 2 models only position the power cable ring  lugs wires over the terminals with the yellow wires at the top position and the  brown wires at the bottom  Use a Phillips or flat screwdriver to replace the two  screws removed earlier     4  Place the Protective Screen on top of the Power Supply  then install all four Pro   tective Screen mounting screws  Figure 7 35   Make sure that neither power ca   ble is pinched by the Screen     5  Guide the Switch Bracket  FRONT  Cable and the I O port cable through the  openings in the top of the TLS and reconnect them to the Executive PCBA   Figure 7 34   Make sure that the connectors are fully inserted  until the locking  tabs of the mating connectors are fully closed     6  Place the Rear Service Panel onto the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to reinstall all six Rear Service Panel mounting screws  Figure 7 34      7  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 13 5 Dual Bay Handler Power Supply Removal    NOTE   
19.   Figure 7 19 Fan Wire and Butt Splice    7 28 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 8 4 Fan Assembly Removal for 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models                    h Carriage l  BA Assembly   o  Aei L i 3    Quarter turn  Fasteners                   Drive Bay  PCBA                              Air Filter                        Clamps Q S czo p  Front View Rear View                Figure 7 20 TLS Front and Rear Views   6460 Model Shown with Rear Access Cover Removed    7 8 4 1 Front Panel Fans  Refer to Figure 7 20    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Open the cabinet door     3  Use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the single quarter turn fastener at the top of  the Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise     4  Remove the Air Filter Clamp and air filter from the TLS     5  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1   then remove the right Side Panel   Section 7 4 3   The openings in the right side of the TLS    frame give access to the  nuts on the back of the Fan Assembly s mounting screws     NOTE    In the next step  the nuts on the back of the mounting screws come loose when the screws are re     moved        6  Remove the two Fan Assembly mounting screws  See Figure 7 21      7  Remove any cable ties and or cable wraps to expose six to eight inches of the red  and black  24 AWG wires attached to the Fan Assembly     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 29    8  Carefully cut the red and black wires six to eight inches away from the Fan A
20.   Index    This value indicates whether or not the Carousel Position sensor on the carousel  PCBA is OPEN  with light passing through an indexing slot   or BLOCKED  by the  gear guard   It changes state as the gear guard s slots pass through the sensor   s  beam     The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    e STEP DOWN  Execute this command to rotate the carousel motor one step in the clockwise direc   tion  The Current Pos value will decrease by one  There are 3200 motor steps per  carousel revolution     e STEP UP  Execute this command to rotate the carousel motor one step in the counterclockwise  direction  The Current Pos value will decrease by one  There are 3200 motor steps  per carousel revolution     5 4 7 The Private Configuration Menu    Configuration   Defaults       Demonstrations YES    SCSI       5 4 7 1 Demonstrations    This menu allows for the Operation Demonstrations menu to be hidden     YES The Operation Demonstrations menu is visible and allows  for the selection of Feature List or Random Moves  The Feature  List item is used to display messages about TLS features  The  Random Moves causes the changer to make continuous random  cartridge moves     NO The Operation Demonstrations menu is hidden     5 4 8 The Private Configuration Defaults Menu    Defaults  ine 1 DEFAUL  Oa 2IL  Ose 2222222222  uine 2 DEFA  22222222     22222222     ine 3 DEFAUL  22222222     22222222     ine 4 DEFAUL  22999999090                                                                     
21.   Ps Power Switch    Drive Bay PCBA       Rear Guide Shaft             Private Slot             Cooling Fans                                                                AC Power  oe Receptacle  Tape Drives     Front Rear  Vertical  Y  Axis Tape Drive Power Supply    Home Sensor Probe  Y Clear Emitter Assembly    Figure 2 5 Single Bay TLS Side View    2 10 Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    Handler Power Supplies  2     Blower Power Supply ne ee    Right Side Left Side                               Executive PCBAs  2                    SCSI Connectors       Power Switch Sale                                                                                                                                        of     kz  gt  KD Tape Drives   Tape Drive N  H  8  Maximum  Power Supplies  4   7  e  _    Tape Drive  Fuse     M zal h Supplies  4   8 q ee   AC aie a  YV ey Drive Bay PCBAs  4   Receptacle  gt           Blower       Drive Bay PCBAs  4     Figure 2 6 Dual Bay TLS Rear View    501090 Rev  F Description and Theory of Operation 2 11    Handler Power Supplies  2     Left Right  Side Side        if    I O Port Front Opening                                                           Blower Power Supply    Carousels a EO       Front Guide Shaft  2   sea Carriage  Handler     Gripper and  Supporting Guide Shaft  2     Barcode Reader  2   a a Jt Carousel Motor  2   Shuttle ee a    Blower                                                    Carousel PCBA  2       
22.   TT TT        fofete  fafefi ofa    TT    Tt             Display line one always  indicates the title  or its  abbreviation  of the   current menu or function     The item pointer to the left of an    item indicates which item will be A dot in front of an item indicates a DOWN and UP arrows indicate  acted upon when the ENTER key sub menu  To go to the sub menu  additional lines are to be seen by  is pressed  For example  press press the ENTER key  scrolling the display with the UP  ENTER when the arrow points to and DOWN key     Configuration and the display will  change to the Configuration menu     Figure 3 4 Top Menu Display    If the arrow is positioned next to Operation and then ENTER is pressed  a display  similar to that shown in Figure 3 5 will be observed     The up and down arrows at the right edge of the display indicate that additional  choices are available  These additional choices can be viewed by using the A  UP  and  Vv DOWN  keys to scroll the display     To go back to the Top Menu from any point  press the EXIT key until the Top Menu is  displayed  The MENU key can also be pressed to accomplish the same result with a  single keystroke  To leave the menu system entirely  press the EXIT or MENU key  while the Top Menu is displayed     Display line one gives the title of the current menu or function   The TLS will always try to spell out menu names as completely  as possible in the 20 characters available     A series of leading dots  indicates that the next
23.   Y I 0 dd Y I O PORT   tddddd  Y PRIVATE  d Left Side of Y PRIVATE   ddddd  Y SHUTTLE  d Dual Bay Libraries Y SHUTTLE   tddddd  Y STORY d Y STORY 0  tddddd  Single Bay Libraries Right Side of    Dual Bay Libraries    The Calibration Data Status screens display the calibration data determined by the  CALIBRATE command  The Calibration Left and Right screens show the data for the  respective sides of dual bay libraries  Note that the I O port data only appears in the  Calibration Right screen  If  for example  the user encounters some particularly diffi   cult Handler problem  it may become necessary to relay the data on this screen to a  Qualstar Technical Support technician     The Calibrated values and the Valid values indicate whether or not the calibration  data determined by the CALIBRATION command is within acceptable limits  If the  calibration data is not valid  the Handler will not operate     The following calibration data is displayed on the Calibration Data Status screen     e Calibrated  YES NO   This value shows whether or not the calibration process was successfully com   pleted  The left side always indicates yes     e Valid  YES NO   This value shows whether or not the calibration data has been initialized   The left side always indicates yes     501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 11    5 4 6    5 12    CRTPRS  This value is the threshold for the Cartridge Presence sensor s optical detector     T OCLR  This value is the threshold for the I O port clear sensor s
24.   an inexperienced person  If intermittent or unusual system problems are encountered   we recommend that the user contact Qualstar s Technical Support Department first   before the user tries to analyze the problem using the logged activity information pre   sented in this section     501090 Rev  F Maintenance Menu 4 3    NOTE    Use the Configuration Advanced Log menu to control which categories of information get  logged  Since the data log memory size is fixed  turning off unwanted data categories frees up log    memory space for the data categories that the user wishes to log  Refer to the Configura   tion Advanced Log section in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual   Qualstar document number 501450  for details        4 2 1  Maintenance Display Log CLEAR Command    CAUTION    Invoking the CLEAR command clears the entire data log     4 2 2  Maintenance Display Log LOCK Command    This command locks the log so that no entries can be changed or new ones added     4 2 3 Maintenance Display Log UNLOCK Command    This command unlocks the log and allows data to be tabulated     A complete description of all of the possible data logged by the TLS is beyond the  scope of field service requirements and is therefore not included in this manual  The  logging system is most effectively used by a field service person who is working under  the direction of a Qualstar Technical Support technician     4 4 Maintenance Menu 501090 Rev  F    4 3  Maintenance Display Log
25.   as you install the Carousel PCBA     Make sure that the Carousel PCBA is replaced with the 500617 02 2 version of the  PCBA        1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Hold the Carousel PCBA level and turn it so that the Carousel Position Sensor  faces the Carousel Gear Guard     3  Gently slide the PCBA along the Carousel Gear Guard toward the left  rear of  the cabinet and fit the PCBA down over the PCBA Alignment Pin  Figure 7 67      4  Align the Carousel PCBA spacers under the PCBA with the PCBA mounting  screw holes  Figure 7 67      5  Use a Phillips screwdriver to install all 3 PCBA mounting screws  then tighten  the screws until they are snug  Figure 7 67   If necessary  rotate the carousel  slightly by hand to reach each PCBA mounting screw     6  Reach in through the cabinet door and connect the CAROSL Cable and the Car   ousel Motor Power Cable to the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 67   The connectors are  keyed to fit only one way     7  For each Magazine Anchor that was removed  use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to remove the two Receiver Mounting Screws  Position a Magazine Anchor    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 89    at the bottom of the receiver and align the mounting screw holes  Insert the two  Receiver Mounting Screws through the Magazine Anchor and tighten them se   curely with a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  See Figure 7 68     8  If removed on a 62xx or 82xx library  replace the left Side Panel  Section 7 4 4    9  If remove
26.   cc cccccccccsssssssceeeececeesesssseeeeeeeeseneneees 5 17  5 4 11 The Private  Display Locations Menu          cccccccccccccccecesecececeeeseseeeceeeceseseeeeeeeeeeeess 5 18  5 4 12 The Private Display Positions Status Screen            ccccccccccceceseessesssceeeseesesensasees 5 20  5 4 13 The Private Display Sensors Status Sereen            ccccsesssceccceceeeessesssceeeseeseeensasees 5 21  5 4 14 The Private DriveBay Menu          cccccccccccccccecececeeeeeceesecececececececececececececeseceseeaeaeaes 5 22  5 4 15 The Private  Executive Menu       ceeesecccesssnceceesececeeseececeeesencecesseneeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeenes 5 27  6  Troubleshooting Fosie55 cess cebesscescdedldasatod casasees aereas aTa Ea E daa svueds ouates    aasevsezoueteeades 6 1  6 1 Power Up and Initialization Failures         sosesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesssesssessssssssssssssssssso 6 3    viii 501090 Rev  F    6 2     Operation Failures is esc cssscce daner ea ETE gd os bia en dts es av icone eas vb bnew 6 10    6 3     Calibration  Pallures   ccci tics tieiietiteeccesessedacebsvedenssssecudtcesuvdedsnosenuads savddesadeounrdssuvnedeasavs 6 14  7  Field Replaceable Units  FRUS               s sccccccsssssssssessccccsssesssssecccecececsssessecseceesceees 7 1  TA  introdutor e cose r chen de E A cite os A AE 7 1  7 2 Field Replaceable Units  FRUS         cccccccccccccccccccccececeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 7 2  7 3 Required Tools and Materials         cccccccccccccccccccccececececec
27.   e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    e Flat blade Screwdriver   Dual Bay Models     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 69    A on    Access Holes  2     Drive Bay PCBA             Figure 7 48 81xx Series The Drive Bay PCBA    7 17     7 70    1 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 6110 and 8111 Models    1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      Drive Bay  Opening    Tape Drive  Connector    Nut and Washer  4     Remove the right Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section 7 4 3      Remove the tape drive assembly  if installed in the TLS     Remove the Tape Drive Power Supply  Section 7 15 1      Disconnect all the cables from the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 48      NOTE    In the next step  the washers and nuts on the PCBA mounting studs may drop into the cabinet    when they are being removed        Reach through the two access holes in the rear of the TLS with a 1 4 inch nut   driver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  to remove the PCBA mounting nuts     Figure 7 48   Access the remaining two PCBA mounting nuts from the drive bay    opening and remove them     Carefully lift the Drive Bay PCBA off the PCBA Mounting Studs and out of the TLS     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     501090 Rev  F    9  Retrieve any washers or nuts that may have fallen into the cabinet     7 17 2 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 6110 and 8111 Models    1  Insert the Drive Bay PCBA into the TLS and align its mounting screw holes w
28.   higher menu is the Top  Menu           Figure 3 5 The Operation Menu    501090 Rev  F The Menu System 3 5    3 3    3 3 1    3 3 2    3 3 2 1    3 6    Menu Elements    Menu Items    Line 1 of any menu display always indicates the name of the menu  with the exception  of the Top Menu  where menu names are right justified  If space permits  the name of   or an acronym for  the parent menu will precede the menu name  The parent menu  name  if it is displayed  is left justified  Bullets fill the space between the two menu  names  Examples     LINE 1 DISPLAY INTERPRETATION    Top Menu Top Menu   seeeeeeConfiguration Configuration Menu   CA     Control Panel Configuration Advanced Control Panel Menu  CA Changer Inventory Configuration Advanced Changer Inventory Menu  OES  eeeeeeeeDisplay Operation Element Status Display Menu       Lines 2 through 4 of any menu display may contain the following items     Menu Name A Menu Name is displayed with a single leading bullet   and an upper lower case name  Example   e Maintenance   Command Name A Command Name is displayed in all upper case letters  without a bullet or colon  Example   SET TO DEFAULTS   Value Name A Value Name is displayed with an initial capital letter   a colon after the name  followed by a right justified  value field  Example     Contrast  48    Values    The data to the right of the colon after a value name represents the current value of  that item  There are several types of values     Numeric Values    These value
29.  4      Place the Carousel Midplate in the TLS and align it with the six mounting holes  in the top of the tape drive bay sides     With a Phillips screwdriver install all six Midplate screws that were removed  earlier     From the right and left sides of the TLS  use a Phillips screwdriver to install the  six Midplate screws that were removed earlier  Figure 9 3      Fit the PCBA down over the PCBA Alignment Pin and align the PCBA mounting  screw holes     Use a Phillips screwdriver to install all three 6 32 x 7 16 PCBA mounting screws   then tighten the screws until they are snug     Connect the Carousel Motor Cable to the Carousel PCBA     TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    PCBA Mounting Rear of TLS    Screw Holes ape A E Motor Cable    PCBA Alignment   Midplate  Pin Hole Screw Holes  6           Front of TLS    annn       Carousel Motor  e    Power Cable Connector N                             Carousel  Position Sensor  CAROSL Cable  Optical Switch Pair   Connector D PCBA  A Mounting Screws  3             4      PCBA  a Alignment Pin  PCBA Spacer  3  Tt 3    Figure 9 4 The Midplate and Carousel PCBA             Rear of TLS Nylon Cable Tie             Carousel Motor Attached to TLS Frame  Power Cable Connector  e a ga Motor Cable    o 4 O  Carousel PCBA A a9   la aa oO   5 ey VV  Top View of  Carousel Midplate   Front of TLS    Carousel Motor  Carousel Midplate ee Lge Power Cable Connector         Carousel Motor REAR VIEW    Figure 9 5 Carousel PCBA Installed on Midplate    5
30.  67         Barcode Reader                         Barcode Reader   Rear View        Barcode Reader  Label                            Barcode Reader Label                                           Carriage Assembly   Bottom View     Figure 7 46 Barcode Reader Label    I O Port Assembly    Bottom View eee I O Port Assembly Label        L  Eciam                                                                                                                                     Figure 7 47 1 O Port Assembly Label    9  a  Edit the Configuration Advanced Changer Mechanics menu as  necessary to make sure that all the menu items match the hardware installed in  the TLS     Be especially sure that the proper Carriage revision level  A  B  etc   is displayed  in the menu  The TLS will not operate properly if the Carriage item is not cor   rect     b  If the configuration data was recorded before the old Executive PCBA was  removed  Section 7 16 1   that information can now be used to reconfigure the  new Executive PCBA  However  double check to make sure that all the  Configuration Advanced Changer Mechanics menu items match the  hardware installed in the TLS     7 68 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    NOTE    The TLS automatically rebuilds the calibration data during the calibration operation  Section  7 16 4   The inventory data is automatically restored when the unit is returned to service  How   ever  the custom configuration data  e g   the Carriage revision level  
31.  7    8 4 1 RS 232 Cable Wiring    User Host or PC RLS Library  RS232 Serial Female DB 9 Connector   RS232 Serial Female DB 9 Connector    Table 8 4 RS 232 Cable Wiring Requirements       8 4 2 RS 232 Serial Communications Parameters    Communication Parameter   Setting    Baud Rate 9600    Data Bits   8         Table 8 5 RS 232 Serial Communication Parameters    8 4 3 User Terminal Software Setup Example    Windows 9x and NT users can use the Communications accessory program  Hyper   Terminal  Use the File Properties menu selection to configure the application for  direct communications  Select the appropriate communications port  See Figure 8 8     E TLS Remote Front Panel   HyperT erminal     OF x     File Edit View Call Transfer Help             z      CAPS  NUM  Capture 7           Connected 0 24 44 VT100  9600 8 N 1  SCROLL       Figure 8 7 RLS Remote Front Panel Program Displayed in HyperTerminal    8 8 Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    Select the Configure button to set the communications parameters for a baud rate of 9600  with 8 data  bits  no parity  one stop bit and no flow control  See Figure 8 9     TLS Remote Front Panel Properties       Figure 8 8 Properties Screen    COM2 Properties       Figure 8 9 Configure Screen Under the Properties Menu    501090 Rev  F Firmware Updating 8 9    8 4 4  VT100 Terminal Emulation    Use the File Properties Settings dialog tab to configure the application for  VT100 terminal emulation  You may also consider ASCII Setup param
32.  9    Thntroduction oseon ei errieta eeen KENIS ERANA ANN lan dtees teateedss segieds EEE EAEE KESSENS veces 9 1  92    Model EXP  NSION S esson eot eseina t srera oaa a Sear S E OEE Pa T iaa heoo Tes 9 2  9 2 1 Installing a Model Expansion Kit            nsnsnsnsnsnenensressrersssrsrsrerersrrererersreresrresersrreee 9 2  9 2 2 Entering the Update Password    ccccccscesssecsssesesesesesesesessssseseseseseseseseeeeeeeess 9 10  9 2 3 Reconfiguring the Model Numbet            ccccccccsccccccecesceesesseceeeseceeeesssssseeeeeesseeeneas 9 11  9 2 4 Recalibrating the Unit    ccccsccenesecceceeeeeseeeeesesesesessasaessasasssssesssaessasasasaes 9 12  9 2 5 Clearing the Password           cccccccsssssssccccsecsessssssecscecsccsesensssecseesecsessnsseessecsecsenenees 9 12  93    Barcode  Reade esr Ais deceit lite AAAA AES EA eed visas Eaa 9 12  9 8 1 Required Parts and Tools          c cc ccccccssssssseseseesesesesesesessseseseseseseseseseseseeseseseseseeees 9 12  9 3 2 Barcode Reader Installation    nieee ea eea eE eiae ETEA ES iEn 9 13    501090 Rev  F xi    1  Introduction    1 1 Who Should Read This Manual    This Technical Service Manual is for Tape Library System  TLS  service personnel  It  describes the Maintenance Menu  the Private Menu and instructions for removing  and replacing Field Replacement Units  FRU s   It also contains troubleshooting pro   cedures and after maintenance testing procedures     The following topics are covered in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation an
33.  A D Converter Inputs    501090 Rev  F    The Private Menu    5 17    5 4 11 The Private Display Locations Menu    P  Display Locations  Location  111111  Accessable  FALS  Acess Valid  FALS  Barcodeable  FALS  Label  PSP BO A AC a  ROP  abel  Label Valid  FALS  Occupied  FALS  Occup Valid  FALS  On My Side  FALS  Present  FALS  Pres  Valid  FALS  Source Valid FALS  Source Loc  11111  Synchronized FALS  Type  DRIV  ape Ejected FALS       E m ey                         w E G e a a a a a a e e          NOTE    The Tape Ejected item only appears in the menu if the Type menu item is DRIVE     The Display Locations menu contains data from the library   s internal inventory data   base  The data in this menu differs from the data found in the Operation        Element Status Display menu  because it pertains to the library   s physical  world and does not contain references to SCSI element addresses     The only editable value in this menu is the Location value  which corresponds to a  physical location  Once a Location is selected  all the internal database information  for that location is displayed as follows     5 18 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that the drive has no cartridge inside and that it is  accessible     Access  Valid TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that the drive is communicating with the library   However this does not verify that the drive ID is working  That can only be    done by setting ID   s and looking for the drive
34.  Assembly Replacement               ccccsssssscececeeceesesssseceeceeesesessseeeeeeeesseeeneas 7 40  7 11 TO  Port POBA Garoor r a a Aa ei T e ERRE ASE E eei EREE Eaa 7 41  TITIO Port  PCBA Removal scsi  accscte  cod becsdicecsadecddents  aie ohsradeccvtetasteiciiiiee a a i 7 41  7 11 2 I O Port PCBA Replacement               cccccccccccesssssecececeeceesesssseceeeeeesenensaseeeeeeeesesensas 7 42  7 12 Switch Bracket Assembly  Front Panel             ccccccccccccccessessseceeececeessnseaeeeseceeeeenes 7 43  7 12 1 Switch Bracket Assembly Removal             cccccccccccccssssesssseceeececeesessseeeeeeecsenersaeees 7 43  7 12 2 Switch Bracket Assembly Replacement                ccccccccsssscccececceeeessnssseeeseeseeensaaees 7 44    501090 Rev  F ix    7 13 Handler Power Supplies         cccccccccccccsessssscececcececeessnsscececeesesenssneeeeececesesenssssaeeeeeees 7 46    7 13 1 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Removal   6110 and 8111 Models                7 47  7 13 2 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement   6110 and 8111 Models         7 48  7 13 3 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Removal   54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and  BAK Models cisccicccecccecdesecaliecetsasvscusshsveceush Ueecesetsysceccleveceesshtpoeescnagecuudhlegdensttescessivese 7 48  7 13 4 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement   54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx  and  84xx Models  i e sec naaidsettat chen detest asa nan T 7 50  7 13 5 Dual Bay Handler Power Supply Removal               cccccccccccccceceesesssneceeeese
35.  Axis Home Sensor  Probes  Figure 7 4 and Figure 7 5   which are mounted on the floor of the cabinet        Tools Required     Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver  e 7 64 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench    e 1 8 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench  L shape wrench required    e Torque Wrench   Capable of at least 50 in pounds     e Small Mirror  optional   e Small Flashlight  optional     Material Required     e Loctite 242 Threadlocker    7 8 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Y Clear Detector PCBA    Y Clear Detector I O Port Assembly  Spring Cup Assembly  with Plastic Washer Eee RONE SERP  and Upper Leadscrew          Retaining Screw                                          Control Panel RA             d       Front Guide Shat                   Executive PCBA  Carriage     ___    Handler  Gripper and  Barcode Reader       Carousel PCBA          Vertical  Y  Axis          77  Lead Screw                io Carousel Motor                         f  Sosi Connectors    Pk Power Switch    Drive Bay PCBA       Rear Guide Shaft             Private Slot             Cooling Fans                                                                AC Power  a Receptacle  Tape Drives      Front Rear   Vertical  Y  Axis Tape Drive Power Supply   Home Sensor Probe  Y Clear Emitter Assembly  Figure 7 4 Single Bay TLS Side View  7 9    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     Y Clear Detector  2  Y Clear Detector PCBA    I O Port Assembly    Spring Cup Assembly  with Plastic Washer PRLS  and Upper 
36.  Differential Adapter PCBA Removal         ccccceesceeeeeneees 7 100  7 20 2 SCSI High Voltage Differential Adapter PCBA Replacement    7 100    501090 Rev  F    PEM A E1 tcc a es he tie cad ede ERS E N 7 102    F2N AN QeVaniki Removal i9ei5e  is tibet eb ckects inei ere EE aee E ENE EEA EEEE E N tices 7 102  7 21 2 Q Link Replacement               cccccesesscccccsecesssssesscscesecsesessseescesecsessnsesseaeeesecseneees 7 103  7 22 Shuttle  Assembly ara enea each eecssda ge cevtee devote sede E E A casheces 7 104  7 22 1 Shuttle Assembly Removal           cccccccccccccsssssssssscecececeeeesssssceeesecsesenssnecseeesecseeeeas 7 104  7 22 2 Shuttle Assembly Replacement              cccccsessscccccecesesessssececesecsesensseseeeeeeseneeneas 7 106  7 23 shuttle PCUBAS  c  tistccsetaretitiessheds tuk teitvestddetelte a e a a a 7 107  7 23 1 Shuttle PCBA Removal         cccccecccccssecessceceseeeessaeceeaeeceseeecaeceeaaecseeeeeesaeeseaaeeeenees 7 107  7 23 2 Shuttle PCBA Replacement              c cccccccecessssseceeeeseceeeensnsececesecsesenseceeeeseeseneeas 7 108  7 24 Y Clear Detector POBA ccsnierisvsscssresiiiveiciriraiisreniisveaiiirekiin iiias 7 109  7 24 1 Y Clear Detector PCBA Removal       ceccccccescecsssceseseceeeeeeeeeceesaeceeneeeseeeeneeneaaees 7 109  7 24 2 Y Clear Detector PCBA Replacement               ccccccccsessecececeeeeeessenssseceeeesesensaaees 7 110  7 25 After maintenance Test Procedures            cceccccesseceeeeeeeeceesaeceeaeeceeeeecseeseaaeenenees 7 
37.  Display Entry Menu    MDL     MDLD  At   BDC  Cle  Con   Dri   Exe   FC   FC   FC   I2c       Display    Entry    Right  ddddddddd ddddd    OFF  an  OFF  figuration  OFF  veBay  OFF  cutive  OFF  Events  OFF  Replies  OFF  States  OFF  i OFF       Inventory  OFF  IToport OFF    RBT  RBT    Actions  OFF  Client  OFF       RB  RBT  RBT  RBT  RBT  SCS  SCS  SCS  SCS       Events  OFF  I O Port  OFF  achines  OFF  Operations OFF  States  OFF  I Commands  ON  I Interrupt OFF  I Phases  OFF  I States  OFF       Sequential  OFF    LOC    The information in the data log is frozen when the user enters the Entry menu   No events are logged while the Entry menu is displayed  However  the system    does track the number of events that would have been logged  while the Entry  menu was displayed  and then adds that number as a log entry when the user ex   its the Entry menu  This tells the user how many events occurred while the Entry    menu was displayed        K    CAUTION       1  To view the Entry menu or the Left or Right Entry menu on dual bay units   press the ENTER key while the Maintenance Display Status screen is dis   played  The Display Log Entry menu is the same as the Display Log menu  ex   cept that the At item has been added and the CLEAR and UNLOCK commands    have been deleted     Use the Configuration Advanced Log menu to control which classes of information get logged   Since the data log memory size is fixed  turning off unwanted data classes frees up log memory    s
38.  Effect sensors are used to commutate the motors and deter   mine their relative positions  The brushless DC motors are driven by a three phase  MOSFET bridge  using a 12 volt supply  Each stepper motor is driven by four discrete  MOSFET devices from the same 12 volt supply     Each motion system has an opto switch  infrared  opto interrupter type detector    which is used to determine its reference position     2 2 2 Sensors    TLS models have two types of infrared optical sensors  analog and digital  Each opti   cal sensor has two parts  an emitter and a corresponding detector     Analog Sensor Operation  Analog sensors are used over longer distances than the digital sensors  which have a  range of about only one inch     All analog infrared optical sensors produce a DC voltage proportional to the strength  of the infrared signal at the sensor  This signal is measured by the Analog to Digital   A D  Converter on the Executive PCBAs     Analog Sensors    e Y Clear Sensors  These sensors are referred to in the Installation and Operation Manual as  the Inventory Sentry Beam  A sensor consists of an infrared emitter  mounted on the bottom pan and a detector mounted at the top of the li   brary  The detector in single bay libraries library is mounted on the I O  port PCBA  The detector on the right side of dual bay libraries is mounted  on the I O port PCBA and the one on the left side is mounted on the Y   Receiver PCBA  The infrared beam is modulated at a high frequency  The  
39.  JUALS TAR     The Tape Library Experts      TLS 5000  TLS 6000  TLS 8000  Technical    Service Manual  501090 Rev  F    Important Manual Firmware Revision Information    This manual and the operating firmware for the TLS are revised periodically as the  product is improved  This manual was revised to correspond with the firmware ver   sion indicated below  Do not use this manual with different part numbers or prior ver   sions of the firmware  Check with Qualstar Technical Support about use of this man   ual with newer firmware     Manual Corresponding Firmware    TLS 5000   TLS 6000   TLS 8000    TLS Executive Firmware 700105    Technical Service Manual Version 2 24  501090 Rev  F  31 March 2006       501090 Rev  F    Copyright Notice    Copyright   2006 by Qualstar Corporation     All Rights Reserved    Information contained in this document is copyrighted by Qualstar Corporation  It is  intended for use by Qualstar   s customers and prospective customers to evaluate  inte   grate  operate and maintain Qualstar products  Customers and prospective customers  may reproduce this document as needed for these uses  Reproduction in whole or in  part for any other use or by any other party is prohibited without prior written per   mission from Qualstar Corporation     Every effort has been made to keep the information contained in this document cur   rent and accurate as of the date of publication or revision  However  no guarantee is  given or implied that the document is error 
40.  Panel  as seen from the front of the  TLS  For dual bay models remove the left or right Side Panel depending on  which power supply is being removed  Section 7 4 3      7 58 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Power Supply Mounting Screws  4                               Power Cable Connector    _          2 Wire Cable  Connector                             Protective  Screen                Tape Drive    Power Supply Label Screen Mounting Screws  4     Potential Cable Connector Locations  Power Supply Mounting Screws me Screen Mounting Screws  4                                          Tape Drive   Tape Drive    Power Supply Label  gt   Power Supply Label Da    Protective     1 1  Screen                Power Cable     Connector                                                                                           2 Wire Cable Connector 2 Wire Cable Connector    Power Cable  Connector    Figure 7 41 Tape Drive Power Supplies    4  Remove all four Protective Screen mounting screws     5  Disconnect the Power Cable and the 2   Wire Cable connectors from the Power  Supply PCBA     6  Remove all four Power Supply mounting screws     7  Lift the Power Supply out of the TLS     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 59    7 15 2 Tape Drive Power Supply Replacement    See Figure 7 41    1  Insert the Power Supply into place in the side of the TLS with its connectors ori   ented correctly as seen in Figure 7 41     2  Install all four Power Supply mounting 
41.  R e Susghaeerats 3 3  3 1 5 The    Daisy  Key and I O Port Operation      cc csccssssssssssssessseesseesssessstsesessseesseeen 3 3   o A Bd a 1E Eo  EAV 010s a a ce ee AT 3 5   idle Menu Lenen ecane a a a cedetansdecesgutgeesbuodestevent degeevihdes 3 6  Sided  Mont emin E E odeuyecdadeecectedseecedacseevectogserseze 3 6  A  VALUE an N E E E socugdeeeesdeaseoes 3 6  8 8 3 Location Desionator Siesa aaea i e a i a aa i ia ii 3 7  33A   Editing Valus a a a er EE EEEE RE ARER 3 8   3 4 The Menu Hierarchy          ccccccccccccccccesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesececesesececeseseceseseceeesesueaaaea 3 11   3 5 Displaying the TLS Firmware Revision              cccccccsesssssecececeesessssscecececsesesssseaeeeeeess 3 11   36 gt     Alerts  g Lenin Maas a a a ra nnd alii Aaa nae 3 12   3 7 Dynamic Menus and Menu Items  0         ccc cccccccccccececeeneeenececececececececececeseceeeseeueaeaea 3 12   4  Maintenance Menu            cccsssccccssssssecesssssecesscscecssscscecssssseecsssseesssssoceesesssseesesssseeessooses 4 1  Al Maintenance  Menti iis cine iiiinniaient tain iin nase a AA A naira 4 2  4 2 Maintenance Display Log Menu          cccc ccc cccescscseneseeceeeceeeceaeseseaeaeaeaesessseaessesssssaeaes 4 3    501090 Rev  F vii    4 2 1 Maintenance Display Log CLEAR Command             ccccccccccseceeeesssseceeeeeeeenensenaees 4 4       4 2 2  Maintenance Display Log LOCK Commanid           cccecccccccccceceeeesssseceeececeeneensnsees 4 4  4 2 8  Maintenance Display Log UNLOCK Co
42.  See Figure  8 4 and Figure 8 5     5  When the Q Link uploading programming is complete a screen will appear that  shows the old and new firmware information  See Figure 8 3     Library uploading programming has finished     Old firmware information   Date  1 15 2003   Part number  700105  Revision  2 11    New firmware information   Date  1 30 2003   Part number  700105  Revision  2 12    Figure 8 3 Sample of the Library Uploading Programming Has Finished Screen    A Q Link   Microsoft Internet Explorer          Fle Edt View Favorites Toole Help        SnI 2 B a a w     a   B   amp    B 8   _ Back Forverd Refresh Home Search Favorites Media History Mail Print Edit Discuss Messenger   Sc z    Go  Links   E  Best of the Web E  Channel Guide               Private Firmware Upload Library               Position Handler E CAWINDOWS Desktop Firmware Updates 7001   Browse       Sequential  Unload Drive Now Uploading tinnvere   amp  Support   3  Qualstar Support Choose Browse to select a firmware file to upload or type the name of the file   amp  Private Press enter or select Upload Firmware to begin upload   amp  Upload Firmware   3  Q Link    fA Library Ss    Calibration 241k of 509k  Configuration    Display A D 47   Display Locations  Display Positions  Display Sensors   Drive Bay Download is in progress  The transfer process will take several minutes     Executive     Browsing to another page will stop this transfer   Email    Magazine  Passwords        DDE       Time remaining
43.  To determine which model of Handler power supply is installed in the library  remove the top  and or right side panels then read the Handler Power Supply Label located on the power supply     See Figure 7 38  The label will read 500826 xx x  Make sure that the replacement power supply  has the same part number  or its equivalent  as the one that is to be removed        501090 Rev  F    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1   If removing the right side Handler Power  Supply  remove the right side Panel  Section 7 4 3  to gain access to the cables at  the rear of the TLS     3  This step only applies when removing the right side Handler Power Supply  Use  a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Rear Service Panel mounting  screws  Figure 7 37   then remove the Rear Service Panel on the left side of the  TLS when viewed from the rear     4  This step only applies when removing the right side Handler Power Supply  Dis   connect the Switch Bracket  Front  Cable and the IOPORT Cable from the Ex   ecutive PCBA  Figure 7 42   Slide the cables out from under the three clips on    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 51    the rear of the TLS and then lift the cables up through the openings in the top of  the TLS to provide enough slack to remove the power supply     This step only applies when removing the left side Handler Power Supply  Use a  number 2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws attached to the clips
44.  are read and the new in   ventory data is stored in the inventory database     By default  the library expects a modulus 43 check character  The user must change  the changers    configuration option before using barcode labels without a check charac   ter  All of the labels within the TLS must be of the same check character definition   either all with or all without     The following steps will allow the changers    configuration option to be set to not ex   pect a check character     1  Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu   2  Press the ENTER key once to enter the  Configuration menu   3  Press the ENTER key once to enter the  Configuration Advanced menu     4  Press the ENTER key once to enter the   Configuration Advanced Changer menu     5  Use the VW  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Labe1lCheckChar   6  Press the ENTER key once to begin editing the LabelCheckChar value     7  Press the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key to change the Labe1CheckChar value  from YES to NO     8  Press the MENU key to return to the Top Menu     2 3 Component Identification    501090 Rev  F    Most of the major components are common to all models  The number of tape drives  varies between models  from one to eight   depending upon the size of the TLS and the  number of drives installed     Figure 2 3 through Figure 2 8 show the location of the major components in TLS   5000 6000 8000 models     Description and Theory of Operation 2 7                Handler Power Supply     TE    Executive PCBA
45.  assemblies into the TLS in the drive bays that correspond  to the PCBA that is being installed  Carefully align the Tape Drive Connector   s  on the Drive Bay PCBA with the mating connector   s on the tape drive assemblies   Figure 7 58   It may be necessary to move the Drive Bay PCBA Bracket to prop   erly align the connectors  Refer to Chapter 5 in the Installation and Operation  Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more information on tape drive  assembly installation     7  Confirm that the Tape Drive Connector   s on both tape drive assemblies are fully  inserted into the mating connectors on the on the Drive Bay PCBA     Tape Drive  Assemblies    Drive Bay    Tape Drive  Opening    Connector       Figure 7 58 84xx Series Drive Bay with Tape Drive Assemblies    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 79    10     11     12     13     14     With a use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver reach through the three access holes  in the side of the TLS and tighten the three Drive Bay PCBA Bracket screws   Figure 7 55      Remove the Tape Drive Assemblies from the TLS     Replace any cable ties that were removed when the PCBA was removed from the  TLS     Reconnect all cables to the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 54    Replace the Tape Drive Power Supply or Supplies  Section 7 15 2    Replace the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4      Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 17 7 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement for58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Models    The dual bay 58xxx  68xxx a
46.  back  nearest  the cabinet door      When the power is turned on  the library attempts to drive the grippers  Z Axis  all  the way toward the door  then it verifies that the Z home sensor detects the gripper  assemblies  This error results if this process fails  If one or both grippers are not all  the way against the stop nearest the front door  then the library was unable to com   pletely drive the gripper motor or transmission     Possible causes    1  An Insertion Axis  Z Axis  is jammed or binding    2  An Insertion Axis motor is not turning freely   3  An Insertion Axis motor is not properly connected to the I O port carriage PCBA     4  The I O port carriage cable is damaged     6 1 19 When the power is turned on  the alert Not Clear appears on the control  panel display     501090 Rev  F    This indicates that a Sentry Beam  also known as the    Y Clear     is unexpectedly ob   structed  A Sentry beam is an invisible light beam  which travels from an emitter at  the bottom of the library to a sensor at the top  between the carriages and the car   tridges  Its function is to detect possible collisions between the carriages and other ob   jects in the library     Possible causes     1  A cartridge is not fully inserted into a magazine storage slot  or is hanging off of  a Handler     2  A magazine is not fully seated   3  A tape is inserted in a magazine or storage slot backwards or inverted   4  A tape is protruding excessively from a tape drive     5  An object is bl
47.  cable  ties to each other  Figure 7 32      10  Tighten the cable ties  without crimping the cables  until they secure the Switch  Bracket Ribbon Cable to the Display Cable     11  Trim off the excess length of plastic from each Nylon Cable Tie     12  Remove all six mounting nuts from the Switch Bracket Assembly mounting  studs  Figure 7 31      13  Ifthe spacers and the Spring Finger were removed  mount the Spring Finger  onto the top two mounting studs  then place two spacers onto the top two mount   ing studs  Place the four remaining spacers onto the four lower mounting Studs   Figure 7 31      14  Slide the Switch Bracket Assembly onto the mounting studs  Figure 7 31      15  Thread all six mounting nuts onto the mounting studs  then use a 1 4   inch nut   driver to tighten the mounting nuts until they are snug  Figure 7 31      16  Remove the slack in the ribbon cable  so that it doesn   t interfere with the car   riage movement  by gently feeding any excess cable up through the opening in  the top plate     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 45    7 13 Handler Power Supplies    DANGER    TO AVOID THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY  ALWAYS WAIT ABOUT ONE  MINUTE AFTER THE POWER IS TURNED OFF AND THE POWER CORD IS    DISCONNECTED  BEFORE TOUCHING THE HANDLER POWER SUPPLY OR THE  TAPE DRIVE POWER SUPPLY        GEFAHR    UM VERLETZUNGEN ZU VERHINDERN WARTEN SIE BITTE 1 MINUTE  NACHDEM SIE DEN STROM AUSGESCHALTET HABEN UND DAS STROMKABEL  ENTFERNT HABEN  BEVOR SIE 
48.  date the configuration information in the new Executive PCBA to match the library   s  installed hardware  see Section 7 16 3   Do not  under any circumstances  apply power       501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 63    to the TLS while the cabinet door is closed if you think the unit   s configuration is in   correct  If in doubt  open the cabinet door  apply power to the TLS and check the unit   s  configuration     never guess     CAUTION    To prevent possible injury or equipment damage  BEFORE APPLYING POWER af   ter the Executive PCBA is replaced  MAKE SURE THE CABINET DOOR IS OPEN     When power is applied to the TLS while the cabinet door is open  no TLS motors    will operate  The configuration information in the new Executive PCBA must be  updated to match the library   s installed hardware  BEFORE any TLS motors are al   lowed to operate  See Section 7 16 3        Executive PCBA Flash PROM    The flash PROM on the Executive PCBA contains only the operating firmware and  none of a unit s configuration information  The number of items in the configuration  data set may change with firmware revisions  It is always recommended that when  changing the Executive PCBA  the firmware revision level remain unchanged until  the new board is properly installed and the unit works satisfactorily  Only then  should the firmware be upgraded  Don t attempt to change two things at once  it can  cause problems     7 16 2 2 Replacing the Executive PCBA    7 64    1  This 
49.  dddddddddd    dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd       dddddddddd    4 7    The Display Statistics status screen displays a summary of events that have occurred  since the TLS was built  All values are decimal counts of the number of times an event  has occurred  Displayed values include     e Aborts  This value is the number of times that a Handler movement has been aborted  The  most frequent cause for Handler aborts is opening the front door     e DoorOpn  This value is the number of times that the front door has been opened     e Exchang  This value is the number of cartridge exchanges that have been performed  includ   ing exchanges executed by SCSI command and exchanges executed by operator  command via the menu system     e Filter  This value is the number of minutes since the air filter was last changed     e Grips  This value is the number of times that the cartridge Gripper solenoid has been ac   tuated    e I Calls    This value is the number of times that the    Daisy    MENU key have been  pressed to activate the I O port     e I Moves  This value is the number of times that the I O port slot has moved   The I O port  slot s extend retract cycle counts as two moves      e I Steps  This value is the number of I O port stepper motor steps  200 revolution  800 inch      e Minutes  This value is the number of power on minutes     e Moves  This value is the number of cartridge moves     e Picks  This value is the number of times th
50.  determined using the menu system  provided the menu system has not been locked by the system administrator                                                                                                                             4 WA            yy ee  yu f   E DLT Tape Cartridge  a RURANA To wie ie es  ce IMO TTA eM LTO  Write Enable Protect   ee   Tape Cartridge  Tab Window   shown unlocked   n ll  Mn A ae   0  Se oopa                Figure 3 3 Inserting a Tape Cartridge into the I O Port    NOTE    DLT tape cartridges are write protected when the Enable Protect tab is moved to the left  show   ing an orange stripe through the tab s window     LTO tape cartridges are write protected when the Enable Protect tab is moved to the right  Tape  cartridges will show a    locked    symbol on the face of the tab     SAIT tape cartridges are write protected when the Enable Protect tab is moved to the right        3 4 The Menu System 501090 Rev  F    3 1 5 2 Parking the Handler s   While the operating display is visible  Figure 3 1   press and hold down the     Daisy     key to view the    Daisy  key menu  Figure 3 3   press the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key  to execute the PARK HIGH or PARK LOW command  then release both keys     3 2 The Top Menu    To see the Top Menu  turn on the TLS  wait until it displays the date and time  then  press the MENU key  The operator should see a display like the one in Figure 3 4     DEERE Reese  lfet ilolla tiee                efefafitetefe nfalatetet   
51.  inch Cable Ties    Air Filter Removal Replacement    DANGER    TO PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF PERSONAL INJURY  DO NOT REPLACE AN  AIR FILTER ELEMENT WHILE THE TLS    POWER IS ON  ONCE AN AIR FILTER    ELEMENT IS REMOVED  THERE IS NOTHING TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL  CONTACT WITH THE MOVING FAN BLADES        GEFAHR    UM EVENTUELLE PERSONLICHE VERLETZUNGEN ZU VERMEIDEN  WECHSELN  SIE KEINEN LUFTFILTER WAHREND DER STROM DES TLS EINGESCHALTET IST   SOBALD DER LUFTFILTER ENTFERNT WURDE  IST NICHTS MEHR    VORHANDEN  DAS VOR DEM VERSEHENTLICHEN KONTAKT MIT DEN  VENTILATORENBLATTERN SCH  TZT        Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F         Carriage Assembly                            Me Quarter turn Fastener  i                          Air Filter Clamp          Figure 7 16 TLS Front View     8222 Model Shown    501090 Rev  F    Refer to Figure 7 16     1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Open the cabinet door     Use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the single quarter turn fastener at the top of  the Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise  Figure 7 16      Remove the Air Filter Clamp from the TLS     Remove the air filter     a  If you only want to replace the Air Filter at this time  replace the old Air Fil   ter with a new one  then reinstall the Air Filter Clamp     IMPORTANT    Never try to clean and reuse an old Air Filter  If an old Air Filter is not yet dirty  enough to be replaced and is being reinstalled  make sure that the side that was  faci
52.  is on the cartridge  it will be scanned several times before the  library abandons the effort     Possible causes     1  The Mag  Labels value in the Configuration Advanced Changer Inventory  menu is set to ALL  and some of the magazine cartridges do not have bar code  labels  Change the Mag  Labels value to SOME  or put barcode labels on all of  the magazine cartridges     2  The Seq Labels value in the Configuration Advanced Changer Inventory menu  is set to ALL  and some of the sequential cartridges do not have bar code labels   Change the Seq Labels value to SOME  or put bar code labels on all of the se   quential cartridges     501090 Rev  F Troubleshooting 6 11    6 2 6    6 2 7    6 12    During operation  the alert Cart Jammed appears on the control panel  display  and there is no cartridge in a Handler s gripper     This is typically the result of a gripper attempting to remove a cartridge from a stor     age location or tape drive  and it fails     Possible causes     1     2     10     11     12     The target magazine is not fully seated    The target cartridge is installed in the magazine upside down    The target cartridge is stuck in the magazine    The library is configured for the wrong TLS model    If the location is a tape drive  the drive is configured to the wrong type   A Handler s gripper solenoid mechanism has malfunctioned    A Handler   s gripper solenoid is out of adjustment    A Handler s gripper spring has failed    The calibration data is corrup
53.  magazine slot is selected     Table 3 2 physical Character Definitions        p  H     The Handler  single bay models    pL H  The left Handler  dual bay models    The right Handler  dual bay models    The Shuttle  runs between the two handlers in dual bay models   The I O Port  all models     The first magazine storage location  Face 1  Story A  Slot 01  single bay models     The last storage location in the first magazine  Face 1  Story A  Slot 11  single bay models   Note that TLS 6000 models have 10 slots and the TLS 5000 and TLS 8000 models have 11     O  H    Oj  O   gt     o   v        ojo   gt   Db  B  o    D  ro     The first magazine storage location  Left Carousel  Face 1  Story A  Slot 1  dual bay models   Note that TLS 6000 models have 10 slots and the TLS 5000 and TLS 8000 models have 11              D  i    The last storage location in the first magazine  Left Carousel  Face 1  Story A  Slot 11   dual bay models     Table 3 3 Location Designator Examples    a             3 3 4 Editing Values    To change a displayed value  point to its name using the A  UP  and VW  DOWN  keys   then press ENTER  Not all values are editable  If the cursor does not appear over the  value when the ENTER key is pressed  then the value cannot be changed  If the cur   sor appears over the first character only  the value is either numeric  alphanumeric   or a cartridge location  If the cursor appears over the entire value  it is a multiple   choice value     3 8 The Menu System 50109
54.  optical detector   Appears only in the Calibration Right screen     TV OFULL  This value is the threshold for the I O port full sensor s optical detector   Appears only in the Calibration Right screen     YCLEAR  This value is the threshold for the Inventory Sentry Beam s optical detector   This  sensor is also known as the Y Clear Sensor      YCLEARM  This item appears in the menu  but it is not used for TLS 5000 6000 8000 libraries     Y DATA 0  This value is the location of the top tape drive     Y DRIVE Ofst0 through Y DRIVE Ofst3  This item appears in the menu  but it is not used for TLS 5000 6000 8000 libraries     Y FIXED 0  and Y FIXED 1   This item appears in the menu  but it is not used for TLS 5000 6000 8000 libraries     Y I O PORT  This value is the location of the I O port slot   Appears only in the Calibration Right screen     Y PRIVATE  This value is the location of the Private Slot on library models that contain Private  Slots     Y SHUTTLE  This value is the location of the Shuttle     Y STORY 0  This value is the location of the bottom slot  in the bottom magazine  on the first face     The Private Carousel Menu    Carousel  Current Stop  d  Demand Stop  d  ABORT SLEW  SLEW          Current Pos tddddd  Index  BLOCKED  STEP DOWN   STEP UP                            The Carousel menu allows the user to completely control the Carousel and to display  the Carousel s current position     The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    NOTE    Some items in the Private Carous
55.  possible damage to the unit  open the cabinet door before applying power  When    the cabinet door is open  the carriage will not move when power is applied  The  unit must be reconfigured for the new hardware  before the carriage is allowed to  move under its own power        TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    1  Open the cabinet door   2  Reconnect the power cord and turn on the TLS power   3  Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 1 to enter Update as the password     4  Follow the instructions in Section 9 2 3 to reconfigure the TLS   9 2 3 Reconfiguring the Model Number    NOTE    If the TLS is restricted  it may not be possible to change the TLS model number in the    Configuration  Advanced Changer Mechanics menu  See Section 5 1 for de   tails about restricted units        1  Press the MENU key once to display the Top Menu  with the pointer in the left  margin of the LCD pointing to Configuration     2  Press the ENTER key to enter the Configuration menu     NOTE    See the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar document number    501450  for complete details about the Configuration menu        3  Press the ENTER key to enter the Configuration Advanced menu     4  Press the ENTER key to enter the Configuration Advanced Changer  menu     5  Press the V  DOWN  key repeatedly to move the pointer to Mechanics  then  press the ENTER key to enter the Configuration Advanced Changer   Mechanics menu  If necessary  press the W  DOWN  key to move the point
56.  pressing ENTER highlights the first character  of the field by superimposing a flashing cursor over it  This indicates the Edit mode  is active and the value of the highlighted character can now be changed using the  A  UP  and     DOWN  keys     e Inthe Edit mode  pressing ENTER moves the cursor one character to the right  If  the cursor is over the rightmost character  pressing ENTER moves it back around  to the leftmost character  The action repeats if the ENTER key is held down     e Ifa value contains a multiple choice field  pressing ENTER highlights the field by  superimposing a flashing cursor over it  Pressing ENTER again has no effect     3 2 The Menu System 501090 Rev  F    3 1 4 The EXIT Control Key    The EXIT key behaves as follows     While editing a menu item   s value  pressing the EXIT key exits the editor and restores  the pointer to the menu item  Note that all values changed during editing are actually  changed  exiting does not undo those changes  Press the EXIT key  while pointing to  any item in a menu  to return to the next higher menu  Press the EXIT key while the  Top Menu is displayed to exit the Menu mode     3 1 5 The    Daisy  Key and I O Port Operation    When the Operating Display is visible  the     Daisy  key can be used together with  the A  UP   V  DOWN   or MENU key to perform any one of three special functions     s   MENU  Operates the I O port         A  Executes the PARK HIGH command   This command moves the carriages to the top of t
57.  replace the screws removed in Section 7 4 3  step 6   Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      Close the cabinet door     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     7 7    7 5 Carriage Assemblies    P N 501196 01 8    A Carriage Assembly contains a Gripper assembly  for grasping the tape cartridges   a  Carriage PCBA  a Cartridge Presence Sensor  a Vertical Axis Home Sensor and a  Barcode Reader   A barcode reader is optional on some models   Because the Carriage  Assembly is used to move tape cartridges  it is referred to as the Changer in all of the  TLS menus     Single bay libraries contain one Carriage Assembly and TLS 58xxx 68xxx 88xxx  dual  bay  models contain two identical Carriage Assemblies referred to as the left and right  Carriage Assemblies when viewed from the front of the TLS  Note that dual bay car   riage assemblies have three guide shafts and the single bay models contain two  The  replacement procedure that follows will apply to replacing Carriage Assemblies from  either single or dual bay models  making note of specific operations when required     This section includes FRU information for the entire Carriage Assembly and lubricating  instructions for the Insertion  Z  Axis Leadscrew and the Vertical  Y  Axis Leadscrew     CAUTION    Be very careful not to damage a Vertical  Y  Axis Home sensor while removing a  Carriage Assembly  There is very little clearance between the sensors  underneath    and to the rear of the Carriage Assemblies  and the Vertical  Y 
58.  test  Perform a STOP command to stop the test at the  end of a complete pass  STOP only appears when a test is running  START and       CLEAR only appear when a test is stopped     4 10 Maintenance Test Keyboard Status Screen    4 10    Test Keyboard  ER  amp  EXIT to exit                   Ex  Re   En  Me  ddddd          The Test Keyboard status screen provides a direct indication of menu control key  functionality  Whenever a key is pressed  its 2 character abbreviation appears on the  screen  Up  Ex  Re  Do  En  Me   If a key is pressed and held down  a blinking asterisk      appears on the screen next to the key s abbreviation     To exit the Test Keyboard screen and return to the Maintenance menu  press the  EXIT and ENTER keys at the same time     NOTE    During normal operation  pressing and holding a key down results in automatic repeat keystroke    activity        When all keys are released  the bottom two lines of the Test Keyboard screen should  be blank  with the exception of the keystroke counter display in the lower right corner  of the screen     The keystroke counter display indicates the number of key presses that occur while  the Test Keyboard screen is in use  The keystroke count should increase by one and    Maintenance Menu 501090 Rev  F    only one number each time a control key is pressed  The keystroke count should not  increase while a key is held down or when a key is released  If the keystroke count  does increase while a key is held down  or when 
59.  the PCBA being removed  See Figure 7 61  Save the screws for later  use     9  Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through one of the openings in the  right side of the TLS    frame     10  Usea 1 4 inch nutdriver to remove the six PCBA mounting nuts and washers   then lift the PCBA off the mounting studs of the Bracket  Figure 7 62   Note that  the spacers behind the PCBA come loose when the PCBA is removed     Cable Connections       Upper Drive Bay PCBA Lower Drive Bay PCBA    Figure 7 60 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Models Right Side Drive Bay PCBAs    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 81    Screwdriver    Access Holes  4     Drive Bay PCBA  Brackets    Opening in side of TLS        Figure 7 61 58xxx 68xxx and 88xxx Models Right Side Drive Bay PCBA Brackets and Access Holes                                Drive Bay PCBA  Mounting Nuts  6                       Figure 7 62 Drive Bay PCBA Mounting Nuts    7 17 7 2 Right Side Drive Bay PCBA Replacement    1  Before replacing the Drive Bay PCBA  determine that the board has the proper  jumper and IC  integrated circuit  configuration  For the Upper Bay Board  P N  501257 03 4  a jumper must be installed on the board at the SDA connector and  a jumper must not be present at the SCL connector  The IC component must be  installed at location U1  For the Lower Bay Board  P N 501257 02 6  jumpers  must not be present at the SDA and SCL connectors and the IC component must  be removed at location U1  See Figure 7 63   
60.  the TLS  see Section 5 3 2 for details      7 110 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 25  After maintenance Test Procedures    501090 Rev  F    The maintenance procedures listed below do affect the TLS    calibration  After any of  these procedures are completed  follow the instructions in Section 5 3 2 to recalibrate  the TLS     Remove and replace a Carriage Assembly    Remove and replace a Carriage Assembly PCBA    Remove and replace the I O Port Assembly    Remove and reinstall replace the I O Port Assembly PCBA   Remove and replace an Executive PCBA    Remove and reinstall replace the Shuttle Assembly PCBA   Remove and replace a Shuttle Assembly PCBA     Remove and replace the Y Clear Detector PCBA     If you have performed maintenance that does not affect the TLS    calibration  like  changing an air filter or the fan assembly  no special after maintenance test proce     dures are necessary  In this case  executing the CALIBRATE command is not recom     mended     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 111    8     Firmware Updating    8 1 Firmware Replacement    All firmware is contained in dual inline integrated circuits  which are easily changed  without the need for special tools  Refer to Table 8 1 for a list of the applicable boards   PCBA   s     Printed Circuit Board Assemblies  and firmware part numbers     Additionally  the firmware found on the Executive boards is contained in Flash   EPROMs which may be uploaded through the Medium changer   s in
61.  the power is turned on  no motion occurs  the control panel dis   play does not light up and the machine makes a regular  clicking sound     The power supply modules are equipped with a feature that shuts them off if a short  on the output is detected  and a moment later they attempt to restart  They will re   peat this until the problem is cleared or the power is turn off  This sequence causes  and audible click  which can be an aid in finding the problem     Possible causes   1  A Handler power supply module has failed     2  There isa short in an Executive PCBA s  12V circuits     6 1 2 When the power is turned on  no motion occurs  the control panel dis   play does not light up and the machine is quiet     Possible causes    1  The unit is not connected to an AC power source    2  The AC power source is not active    3  The fuse is blown    4  The AC power is not connected properly internally    5  The fuse is blown due to a short in the internal wiring    6  The fuse is blown due to a failed power supply module    7  A Handler power supply module is not connected to an Executive PCBA   8  A Handler power supply module has failed     9  There is a short in an Executive PCBA s  12 volt circuits     6 1 3  When the power is turned on  the control panel display lights up but  does not show text and nothing moves     Possible causes   1  An Executive PCBA has failed     2  An Executive PCBA has never been factory initialized     501090 Rev  F Troubleshooting 6 3    6 1 4    
62.  value can be  edited one character at a time  Alternately  the entire cartridge location value can be  incremented or decremented  through a range of locations  by editing the least signifi   cant digit  or intermediate digits   in a manner similar to editing a numeric value  Re   fer to Section 3 3 4 3 for details about editing numeric values     Cartridge location designators always contain one letter as follows     AorB Magazine Locations  B location not found on all models   H Handler   I T O Port Slot   LorR Left or Right side of dual bay libraries   P Private Slot  not available on all models    S Shuttle on dual bay libraries   T Tape Drive Locations    Refer to Chapter 3 in the TLS 5 6 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar  document number 501450  for the ranges of location values and their physical locations     To select a different designator  place the cursor on the letter and use the A  UP  or  the V  DOWN  key to select a different letter  To further select a location that has  digits  place the cursor over a digit  When magazine location digits are incremented or  decremented  the value rolls over to the next  or previous  magazine  Examples     A to B  3L1B10 to 4L1A01  or 4R2A01 to 3R2B10    3 10 The Menu System 501090 Rev  F    3 4 The Menu Hierarchy    The hierarchical menu system is divided into three menus  Configuration  Mainte   nance and Operation  Each of these menus contains several sub menus  Some of the  sub menus may also contain more 
63.  were removed when accessing the  Fan Assemblies wires     Reinstall the air filter  or install a new one   If an old air filter is being rein   stalled  make sure that the side that was facing the inside of the library is placed  in the same direction as it was when it was removed  Reversing the direction of  an old air filter may cause dirt to be transferred into the library     Replace the Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the quarter turn fastener  clockwise  Figure 7 16 and Figure 7 20      Reinstall the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4   then reinstall the Top Panel   Section 7 4 2      Align the access covers four quarter turn fasteners with corresponding recepta   cles on the rear of the TLS and then using a flat blade screwdriver  tighten the  fasteners to secure the cover  See Figure 7 22     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 33    7 9 Air Filters and Blower Assembly    7 9 1    7 34    Air Filter P N 500584 01 6   Blower Assembly P N 500469 01 0  Dual bay models are cooled and pressurized by a Blower Assembly located between  the drive bays     Tools Required     e Flat blade Screwdriver    e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    Air Filter Removal Replacement    DANGER    TO PREVENT THE POSSIBILITY OF PERSONAL INJURY  DO NOT REPLACE AN  AIR FILTER ELEMENT WHILE THE TLS    POWER IS ON  ONCE AN AIR FILTER    ELEMENT IS REMOVED  THERE IS NOTHING TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL  CONTACT WITH THE MOVING FAN BLADES        GEFAHR    UM EVENTUELLE PERSONLICHE VERLETZUNGEN ZU VER
64.  wires to the PCBA then disconnect the RIGHT connector  Dis   connect the MOTOR connector  Using a 1 4   inch nutdriver  remove the two  mounting nuts which secure the PCBA to the Shuttle Assembly and lift the  PCBA off of the mounting studs  Figure 7 88      3  Reinstall the two PCBA mounting nuts onto the PCBA mounting studs to keep  the PCBA spacers in place     4  To remove PCBA No  501427 01 7  carefully cut the cable tie which attaches the  RIGHT connector wires to the PCBA then disconnect the RIGHT connector  Us   ing a 1 4   inch nutdriver  remove the two mounting nuts which secure the PCBA  to the Shuttle Assembly and lift the PCBA off of the mounting studs  Figure  7 83      5  Reinstall the two PCBA mounting nuts onto the PCBA mounting studs to keep  the PCBA spacers in place     7 23 2 Shuttle PCBA Replacement    1  To replace PCBA No  501317 01 2  remove the two nuts from the PCBA mount   ing studs  then make sure that the two PCBA spacers are in place on the PCBA  mounting studs     2  Align the PCBA with the two mounting studs  then install the PCBA onto the  studs  Reinstall the two mounting nuts onto the mounting studs  then use a 1 4     inch nutdriver to tighten the mounting nuts firmly against the PCBA  Reconnect  the MOTOR connector  Reconnect the RIGHT connector and replace the cable tie  that was removed earlier  Figure 7 83      3  To replace PCBA No  501427 01 7  remove the two nuts from the PCBA mount   ing studs  then make sure that the two PCBA spa
65.  you will need to press down on the upper Leadscrew retain   ing screw at first  to compress the Belleville spring washers enough to engage the threads in the  top of the Leadscrew        23  Usea 1 8 inch Allen wrench to install the upper Leadscrew retaining screw     24  Usea 1 8 inch Allen wrench to back the upper Leadscrew retaining screw out  until the top Belleville washer is flush with the top of the Spring Cup     25   Retighten the upper Leadscrew retaining screw using a torque wrench set to 40  in lbs  At this point  the top Belleville spring washer should be about a 1 16   inch  below the top of the Spring Cup     26  Finally  loosen the upper Leadscrew retaining screw exactly one complete turn   360     No Carriage Assembly adjustments are necessary     27  Manually raise the Carriage Assembly up far enough to expose the ribbon cable  connector on the underside  Verify that the ejectors on the connector are in the  open position     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 5 3    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 19    28  Connect the Carriage Assembly s double ribbon cable connector by pressing in   wards until both ejectors  located on the ends of the connector  lock over the mat   ing connector on the cable     29  Insert the Carriage Cable Clamp into the mating recess on the upper surface of  the Carriage casting  Figure 7 6      30  Insert both Carriage Cable Clamp mounting screws  6 32 x 1 4 inch Socket Head  Cap screws  into the mo
66. 0 Rev  F    3 3 4 1 Editing Multiple Choice Values    If the item contains a multiple choice value  the entire value will be overlaid with  flashing block cursors  Use the A  UP  key to select the next value and the   V  DOWN  key to select the previous value  then press EXIT when done  The list of  choices wraps around  so the operator can see all the choices by using just the A  UP   or V  DOWN  key     3 3 4 2 Editing non Multiple Choice Values    If only the first character of the value is highlighted with a flashing block cursor after  pressing the ENTER key  the value is either numeric  alphanumeric  or a cartridge lo   cation  These values may be edited one character at a time  using the ENTER key to  select the character to be edited  and then using the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key to  change the character s value     NOTE    The cursor wraps around from the last to the first character  Also  the ENTER   amp   UP  or    Vv  DOWN  keys automatically repeat when held down        3 3 4 3 Editing Numeric Values    Numeric values may be edited one digit at a time  or the entire value may be changed   by simply incrementing or decrementing the least significant digit  or any intermedi   ate digit   When incrementing the digit 9  it goes to 0 and a carry is added to the more  significant digits  The opposite effect is true for decrementing  This process will auto   matically stop at the upper and lower limits of the valid range for each item  Remem   ber to take advantage of the a
67. 01090 Rev  F TLS Expansions 9 5    9 2 1 1 3 Adding the Carousel      Pi  Upper Carousel Bearing     T ae ate a            rT Ne oes Upper Carousel Bearing                                                                   Top View  Upper End of Carousel Shaft               Front of TLS   p  Carousel Gear Guard Ia  EE    Carousel Gear  E ma          Lower Carousel Pivot   i                      Mounting ae Midplate  STOWES Carousel Motor Shaft Gear  Motor Cable    Figure 9 6 The Carousel Assembly    CAUTION    Be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor with the Carousel Gear    Guard when you install the Carousel  Figure 9 4 and Figure 9 6         1  Insert the Carousel through the open cabinet door     2  Align the lower Carousel Bearing with the Midplate  then lower the Carousel  down into place  Figure 9 6   Use caution as to not damage the Carousel Gear or  the gear on the Carousel Motor shaft as you lower the Carousel into position     3  Align the upper end of the Carousel Shaft with the Upper Carousel Pivot Sup   port  Figure 9 6   and then lower the Upper Carousel Pivot Support down  through the top of the TLS onto the upper Carousel Pivot  Figure 9 7      4  Align the mounting screw holes in the Upper Carousel Pivot Support with the  mounting screw holes in the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to    9 6 TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    install all three 10 32 x 1 2 Upper Carousel Pivot Support mounting screws   Tighten the screws securely  Figur
68. 1090 Rev  F    Field Replaceable Unit Description FRU Part Number  Min     Shuttle Assembly  TLS 58xxx  500189 03 0  Rev  B or later  7 104    Table 7 1 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs        The times in the Time Min  column are the maximum estimated times  in minutes   required for an experienced technician to replace the corresponding FRU     7 3 Required Tools and Materials    Table 7 2 is a complete list of the tools that are required for all FRU replace   ment installation procedures     Tools List    3 32 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench    7 64 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench  Both short arm and long arm L shape wrenches required   Ball point style preferable     1 8 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench  L shape wrench required     1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver or open end Wrench   Standard and Stubby Short length nutdrivers are required  Number 1 Phillips Screwdriver   Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver   Standard and Long Blade screwdrivers are required   Flat Blade Screwdriver   Torque Wrench capable of at least 50 in pounds    Tape Measure or 12 inch Scale  Diagonal Wire Cutters    Wire Strippers  24 AWG capable   Wire Crimpers  24 AWG capable   Small Mirror  optional     Small Flashlight  optional        Table 7 2 Required Tools    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 3    The materials listed in Table 7 3 may be required when replacing some FRUs     3 inch X 3 32 inch Replacement Cable Ties  Qualstar P N 669 1001 9    Loctite 242 Threadlocker  Piece of Twine  Leadscrew Lubricant    Qualstar P 
69. 111  8  Firmware Updating sorote ens a a EE EEEE ssa E a E aE 8 1  8 1 Firmware Replacement          cccccccccccccceccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 8 1  8 2 Determining the Installed Hardware and Required Firmware               ccccsscceceeeees 8 1  8 2 1 Firmware Update via the SCSI or Fibre Channel Interface            ccceeeseeeenees 8 3  8 3 Firmware Update via Q Link          sesseesssesssesessesseserecsesssseserecssssssesereccsessssoseecesessssesreees 8 5  8 4 Firmware Update via Q Conn          cccccccccccsssssssscecesececsessnsececeeeeseesenssssaeeeecesesensnssaeeeeees 8 7  BA  RS 232 Cable  Wari nig esnie n a a a a a ute bade va havwtiets 8 8  8 4 2 RS 232 Serial Communications Parameters           ssesssssesseesseesserssrrssressersssressressees 8 8  8 4 3 User Terminal Software Setup Example         ssssssessssesssssssssssessssesseserersessssesrrreesess 8 8  8 4 4 VT100 Terminal Emulation eiaa a a e a E aE 8 10  8 4 5 Remote Library Command Mode            sssssssessseesssssseseseesssssseseesecsesssseserersesssseserees 8 11  8 4 6 Xmodem Firmware Download  lt xdl gt  woo    eeccccesssececeeeteeeeceesueeecesnueeeeeenteeeeeees 8 11  8 4 7 Procedure for Replacing the Flash Memory IC on Executive II  III or IV  BOBS  ne Yeabcect yates UEA cana Cues cis A EE Dates abe cel yuhelacedi EE 8 13  9  TES Expansions oosi cist ss sews ccsecsviceu saseelas cu tak ccuses vel stastetele susvoteecivasvess svssdessustutes sovesdecswasveed 9 1 
70. 44 5 113 0 18 75   47 6    30 5   77 5 153 163 235   107    6430  6460  8433  8466  58132  58264 61 9   157 3 37 25   94 62 30 5   77 5 359   163 602   273    68120  68240  88132  88264       Stabilizer feet add 5 0 inches  12 7 cm  to the base width of the 54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx se   ries         Shipping weights include the TLS  data cartridge magazines and accessories       Weight includes accessory box  shipped separately        Empty weights exclude tape drives  magazines and data cartridges     EMPTY      SHIPPING    MODEL HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH WEIGHT WEIGHT   in  cm   in  cm   in  cm   Ib  kg   Ib  kg        Table 2 4 TLS Dimensions  fully loaded units     2 2 General Description    The three family members of Qualstar   s   inch TLS series of tape libraries are     e TLS 5000 series utilizing SAIT  SuperAIT  tape technology  e TLS 6000 series utilizing SDLT  SuperDLT  tape technology  e TLS 8000 series utilizing LTO  all generations  tape technology    Each TLS 5000 6000 8000 cabinet contains a high performance robotics system for  handling data cartridges  one or two drive bays to accommodate the cartridge tape  drives  removable cartridge magazines  power supplies and printed circuit board as   semblies  PCBAs  that contain the TLS electronics  An I O port for inserting and re   moving cartridges under secured host system control is supported in every model  ex   cept for the 6110 and 8111 models  All units operate on any internationally available  AC power so
71. 6 1 14    501090 Rev  F Troubleshooting 6 1    The alerts Carousel Jammed appears on the control panel display  Also  a  Carousel motor makes a loud noise and does not turn  or the carousel turns                 then stops and makes a loud noise             ccceeessseeesesecesectecesssenesssssssssssesssesseeeenes 6 1 15  The Carousel turns for awhile  then the alert XHome Fail appears on the   control panel display  aean a ee hehe aes a ats eS 6 1 16  The alert ZHome Fail appears on the control panel display  and the Insertion   Axis is all the way back  nearest the cabinet door           ccccccccessseceeeeteeeeseeeees 6 1 17  The alert ZHome Fail appears on the control panel display  and the Insertion   Axis is not all the way back  nearest the cabinet dOor             cccccessssscceeeseeeeees 6 1 18  The alert Not Clear appears on the control panel display                ccccccseseeeeeeeseeeeeees 6 1 19  A key on the key pad works intermittently  or completely fails to operate                    6 2 1  The library tries to insert a tape into a tape drive that is already occupied                  6 2 2  A Barcode Reader does not read any bar code labels              ccccsecsccceceseesesseceeeesecseeenssees 6 2 3  A Barcode Reader does not read bar code labels reliably            0  ccccecsessecececeeceesenssees 6 2 4  When the library reads the barcode labels  it scans the tapes without barcode   labels repeat edly  enre nir e eae hh ER E a Dota dh dae sole Paha 6 2 5  The a
72. 6 1 5    6 1 6    6 1 7    3     The firmware on an Executive PCBA was destroyed because the power was in   terrupted while uploading new code  If this happens  you must replace the execu   tive PCBA  or replace the DIP Flash Memory chip on the Executive PCBA     When the power is turned on  the control panel display lights up and  shows text  no errors are displayed  but nothing moves     Possible causes     1     2     The door is ajar     The door is not completely closed   The door appears to be closed  but is not com   pletely shut      The Door Sensor is not working properly   The library is configured to be a model    None        The Control Panel Assembly has failed  or the cable to the Executive PCBA is  damaged  or the plug on the cable is improperly seated     When the power is turned on  the Handler s  moves normally  but the  control panel display remains dark and shows no text     Possible causes     1     2     The Control Panel Assembly has failed or the cable to the Executive PCBA is  disconnected or damaged     The LCD display has failed  or the cable is disconnected or damaged     When the power is turned on  the Handler s  moves normally  the con   trol panel display shows text  but the control panel display remains dark     Possible causes     1     The Control Panel Display s backlight value is set to OFF in the library s Con   figuration menu  or it is set to turn itself off in five minutes  and the time has  elapsed     The Control Panel Assembly has f
73. A    501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 101    7 21 Q Link    P N 501657 01 9  Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver          Mounting   gt  Q      Screws   6   q  go                                  i C                   Figure 7 78 Q Link on Rear of TLS  Dual Bay Model Shown     7 21 1 Q Link Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Q Link panels mounting  screws  Figure 7 78   then move the panel backwards to access the cables     3  Disconnect the AUPWR cable from the POWER connector on the Q Link PCBA  as shown in Figure 7 79     4  Disconnect the SERIAL ribbon cable from the SERIAL connector on the Q Link  PCBA as shown in Figure 7 79     7 102 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Executive PCBA       SERIAL Connector  SERIAL  Ribbon Cable  AUXPWR Connector   behind ribbon cable   AUXPWR Cable  Q Link PCBA    SERIAL Connector    POWER Connector    Figure 7 79 Detail of AUXPWR and SERIAL Cable Connections on Q Link PCBA    7 21 2 Q Link Replacement    This procedure assumes that the PCBA was removed in Section 7 21 1     1  Connect the AUPWR cable to the POWER connector on the Q Link PCBA as  shown in Figure 7 79     2  Connect the SERIAL ribbon cable to the SERIAL connector on the Q Link PCBA  as shown in Figure 7 79 Make sure that the colored edge of the ribbon cable faces  to your right side when the cable is installed     3  Carefully align the Q L
74. An Insertion Axis motor system has malfunctioned     6 2 9 During operation  the alert Vertcl Axis Jammed appears on the control  panel display     This occurs when a carriage attempts to move vertically but is unable     Possible causes     1     2     A carriage is jammed by a cartridge and unable to move freely up or down   A magazine is not seated properly and is colliding with a carriage     A cartridge is hanging off a carriage and is colliding with a magazine or tape  drive     The I O port is interfering with a carriage    A Vertical Axis motor system has failed    A Vertical  Y  Axis leadscrew is binding    A Vertical Axis leadscrew is not attached properly at both ends     The library is configured to the wrong model  and the carriage is colliding with  the top of the library     6 2 10 During operation  the alert Not Clear appears on the control panel dis     play     501090 Rev  F    This indicates that a Sentry Beam  also known as the    Y Clear     is unexpectedly ob     structed  A Sentry beam is an invisible light beam  which travels from an emitter at    the bottom of the library to a sensor at the top  between the carriage s  and the car     tridges  Its function is to detect possible collisions between the carriage s  and other    objects in the library     Possible causes     Troubleshooting 6 13    1  A cartridge is not fully inserted into a magazine storage slot  or is hanging off of  a Handler     2  A magazine is not fully seated   3  A tape is inserte
75. BA come loose when the PCBA    mounting nuts are removed        501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 109    4  Using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  remove the three mounting screws which  secure the Y Clear Detector PCBA to the top of the TLS  Figure 7 84      5  Remove the Y Clear Detector PCBA from the top of the TLS     6  Reinstall the three PCBA mounting screws to keep the PCBA spacers in place     7 24 2 Y Clear Detector PCBA Replacement    1  Note the jumpers on connectors W1 and W2 on the Y Clear Detector PCBA that  was removed  Make sure that the jumpers are in the same location on the re   placement PCBA before it is installed  See Figure 7 85                ye  a    Connector W1 Connector W2    23 ee As       a E we ojn aao  w woga      Jumper Locations on Jumper Locations on  TLS 6110 8111 Models TLS 58 68 88xxx Models    ae                 Figure 7 85 Location of Connectors W1 and W2 on Y Clear Detector PCBA  2  Remove the three mounting screws  then make sure that the three PCBA spac   ers are in place on the PCBA mounting studs     3  Place the Y Clear Detector PCBA on the top of the TLS and align all three  mounting screw holes in the PCBA with the mounting screw holes in the TLS   Figure 7 84      4  Install all three mounting screws and securely tighten the mounting screws us   ing a number 2 Phillips screwdriver     5  Reconnect the ribbon cable at the IOPORT Connector  Figure 7 84    6  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7  Recalibrate
76. CHDEM SIE DEN STROM AUSGESCHALTET HABEN UND DAS STROMKABEL    ENTFERNT HABEN  BEVOR SIE DAS GEBLAESE NETZTEIL SOWIE DAS TAPE   DRIVE NETZTEIL BERUEHREN        P N 500826 08 6    Dual bay library models contain a power supply for the Blower Assembly   Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    7 14 1 Blower Power Supply Removal    Refer to Figure 7 39   1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      3  Remove all four Protective Screen mounting screws  then lift the Protective  Screen off of the TLS     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 55    Protective Screen                                           oe Mounting Screws  4      2 Wire Cable         o Connector       Power Cable  A z Connector   0      P ra  S ea Protective a    Me    Blower Power Supply        e    ae       Power Supply  Mounting Screws  4     Figure 7 39 Top View of Blower Power Supply  As seen from the rear of the TLS     Disconnect the Power Cable and the 2 Wire Cable connectors from the Blower  Power Supply PCBA     Remove all four Power Supply mounting screws     Lift the Power Supply up and out of the TLS     7 14 2 Blower Power Supply Replacement    1     7 56    Lower the Power Supply down into place on top of the TLS  Make sure that when  viewed from the rear of the TLS  the 2 Wire Cable connector is on the left and  the Power Cable connector is on the right  See Figure 7 39     Install all four Power Supply mounting screws  
77. CSI High Voltage Differential Adapter PCBA Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Rear Service Panel mount   ing screws  Figure 7 76   then remove the panel     3  Disconnect the SCSI cable from connector SCSIID on the HVD Adapter PCBA   Figure 7 77       gt     Gently pull the HVD Adapter PCBA away from the Executive PCBA  Figure  7 77      7 20 2 SCSI High Voltage Differential Adapter PCBA Replacement    This procedure assumes that the PCBA was removed in Section 7 20 1     1  Insert all three PCBA spacers on the HVD Adapter PCBA into the mounting  holes in the Executive PCBA making sure that the female WADAPT connector is  aligned with the male ADAPT connector on the Executive PCBA  See Figure  7 77     2  Gently press the HVD Adapter PCBA into place  Make sure that the male and  female WADAPT connectors are fully seated     3  Connect the SCSI Cable Assembly to connector SCSIID on the HVD Adapter  PCBA  Figure 7 77      4  Place the Rear Service Panel onto the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to reinstall all six Rear Service Panel mounting screws  Figure 7 76      7 100 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Executive PCBA          SCSIID PCBA Spacers  3     DD                                                                J  Male WADAPT  esa on HVD Adapter    SE LVD or LVD SE          Female WADAPT  on Executive                      Figure 7 77 HVD Adapter PCB
78. Cable Ties at Rear of 62xx and 82xx Libraries    7 19 2 Single Bay Carousel Motor Replacement   54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx Libraries     1  Align the mounting holes in the Carousel Motor with the corresponding mount   ing holes in the TLS    Midplate  For TLS models 62xx and 82xx the motor   s cable  faces the rear of the TLS and for the 54xx  64xx and 84xx models the motor   s ca   ble faces the left side of the TLS  Figure 7 70      NOTE    For TLS models 62xx and 82xx  the Carousel Motor is mounted in the right side of the cabinet  as    seen from the front   For 54xx  64xx and 84xx models  the Carousel Motor is mounted in the left  side of the cabinet        2  Use a 3 32 inch Allen wrench to install and securely tighten all four Carousel  Motor mounting screws     3  Reconnect the Carousel Motor cable to the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 67      4  For TLS models 62xx and 82xx  replace the motor cable   s nylon cable tie that was  attached to the TLS Frame  Figure 7 71      CAUTION    Be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor with the Carousel Gear    Guard when you reinstall the Carousel  Figure 7 67         501090 Rev  F    5  Align the lower Carousel Bearing with the TLS Midplate  then lower the Carou   sel down into place  Figure 7 70   Be sure to align the Carousel Gear with the  gear on the Carousel Motor shaft as you lower the Carousel into position     6  Align the Upper Carousel Bearing with the Upper Carousel Pivot Support  then  lower the Upper Caro
79. DAS HANDLER NETZTEIL SOWIE DAS TAPE   DRIVE NETZTEIL BERUEHREN        NOTE    To determine which model of Handler Power Supply is installed in the library  remove the top  and right side panels then read the Handler Power Supply Label located on the power supply   See Figure 7 33  Figure 7 35 or Figure 7 38  The label will read 500826 xx x  Make sure that the    replacement power supply has the same part number  or its equivalent  as the one that is to be  removed        Please contact Technical Support for Handler Power Supply part numbers    Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    Single bay libraries contain one Handler Power Supply  The 6110 and 8111 models  supply is mounted on the right side of the TLS while the 54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and  84xx models supplies are mounted on the top of the TLS     The 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain two Handler Power Supplies  referred to as the left and right Handler Power Supplies when viewed from the front  of the TLS  The replacement procedure that begins at Section 7 13 5 will apply to re   placing either Handler Power Supply  making note of specific left or right side opera   tions when required     7 46 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 13 1 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Removal   6110 and 8111 Models    NOTE    To determine which model of Handler Power Supply is installed in the library  remove the top  and right side panels then read the Handler Power Supply Label located on th
80. DriveBay        Bay Left   Bay Right  EEPROM   EEPROM Left   EEPROM Right                   The Private DriveBay menus show the status of installed tape drives  the Drive  Bay circuit boards and the EEPROMs on the circuit boards  In dual bay libraries the  LT1 through LT4 sub menus refer to tape drives installed on the left side and RT1  through RT4 refer to tape drives installed on the right side  as viewed from the front         The Bay Left and Bay Right sub menus refer to the left side and right side Drive  Bay boards respectively  EEPROM Left and EEPROM Right refer to the contents of  the EEPROMs found on the left and right Drive Bay boards respectively  The mean   ing of the EEPROM data is beyond the scope of this document  Single bay libraries  will simply display sub menus T1 through T4  Bay and EEPROM              T                      5 4 14 1 The Private DriveBay  T  Menu    Private DriveBay  T   Type   Parar BOLO Be  Revision    Count Mode        Drive      Information     Status       e Type  The Type value describes what type of drive carrier is installed in the libraries  drive bay  DLT  LTO HP or LTO IBM     e Revision  This value is the current revision of the Drive Bay PCBA firmware     e Count Mode  The Count Mode value is used for diagnostic purposes  When on it sends I2C mes   sages to the Drive Bay     5 22 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    Drive  The Drive value describes what type of tape drive is installed in the drive carrier   Examples  DLT2000  DL
81. HILE THE DOOR IS OPEN  OR WITH THE TOP  PANEL OR SIDE PANELS REMOVED     GEFAHR  UM VERIETZUNGEN ZU VERHINDEM     SCHALTEN SIE ALLE STROMSCHALTER AN DER TLS AUS UND ENTFERNEN SIE  DAS STROMKABEL  BEVOR SIE MIT DER SERVICE ARBEIT BEGINNEN     BENUTZEN SIE DIE TLS NIE WENN DIE TUERE OFFEN IST  ODER DIE DECK    BZW  SEITENPLATTE ENTFERNT SIND           7 1 Introduction    501090 Rev  F    Many of the major components in the TLS are available from Qualstar as separate  Field Replaceable Units  FRUs   Each FRU can be removed and replaced on site by  qualified personnel  Some of the FRUs are mechanical assemblies while others are  Printed Circuit Board Assemblies  PCBAs  or Integrated Circuits     This chapter lists all of the available FRUs  their Qualstar part numbers and provides  detailed removal and replacement instructions     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     7 1    7 2 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs     Table 7 1 lists all of the FRUs available from Qualstar for the TLS 5000  TLS 6000  and TLS 8000 libraries     Field Replaceable Unit Description FRU Part Number  Min      Front Panel   Display   20  10    Drive Bay PCBA  2 Drive Libraries and the 501257 01 8 7 17 3 7 72  top 2 drive positions in 4 Drive models    Drive Bay PCBA  The bottom 2 drive posi  501257 02 6 7 17 5 7 76  tions in 4  amp  8 Drive Libraries    Drive Bay PCBA  The top 2 drive positions in   501257 03 4 7 17 5 7 76  8 Drive models     Carousel PCBA 500617 02 2       7 2 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  50
82. J    eee eer eeeeee o Private     Blower  eCalibration  eCalibration Left  eCalibration Right  CALIBRATE  Carousel   CLEAR ACCESS  eConfiguration  Display A D  Display Locations  Display Positions  Display Sensors  DriveBay  Executive   RESET SCSI BUS                               Press the ENTER key to execute the CALIBRATE command     Follow the instructions that appear on the LCD display  remove all cartridges   install empty magazines at L1A01 and R1A01  press the ENTER key  Use the V   DOWN  key to read the whole message     The calibration process takes about 3 and a half minutes to complete  If the cali   bration process does not succeed  an Alert message indicating that a fault oc   curred during calibration is displayed     The Calibration Left and Right menus display the calibration data  See Section 5 4 4     5 4 2 Private CLEAR ACCESS Command    This command is used to clear the Access value  the active password  and defeat Pri     vate menu access  as explained in Section 5 3 3     5 4 3 RESET SCSI BUS Command    This command forces a BUS RESET command on the SCSI bus  It may be used with  caution to solve system development problems  However  using this command could    501090 Rev  F    prove quite disruptive on a live system     CAUTION    Executing a RESET SCSI BUS Command could adversely affect another device or    host system that is connected to the same SCSI bus  Use this command with great  caution        The Private Menu 5 9    5 4 4    5 10    To Reset 
83. LS    Lower Fan Assembly  Mounting Screws  2        Figure 7 23 Fan Assembly Mounting Screws  7  Remove any cable ties and or cable wraps to expose six to eight inches of the red  and black  24 AWG wires attached to the Fan Assembly   8  Carefully cut the red and black wires six to eight inches away from the Fan As     sembly  Figure 7 18  and then remove the Fan Assembly from the TLS     7 8 5 Fan Assembly Replacement for 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models    Refer to Figure 7 20     7 8 5 1 Front Panel Fans    1  Measure the length of the red and black wires that are attached to the Fan As   sembly that was removed in Section 7 8 4 1     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 31    7 8 5 2    7 32    2  Adda minimum of one inch to the length measured in Step 1  This is the length  that the red and black wires will be cut to on the replacement Fan Assembly    3  Carefully cut the red and black wires on the replacement Fan Assembly to the  length determined in Step 2  Length of old Fan Assemblies wires   a minimum  of one inch     4  Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the end of the red wire    5  Fully insert the end of the red wire into a Butt Splice  Panduit Part Number  BSN22 C or equivalent  and use a wire crimper to securely attach the Butt  Splice to the wire  See Figure 7 19    6  Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the black wire    7  Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the ends of the red and  black wires in the library that were c
84. Leadscrew _7 Handler Power Supply  2     Retaining Screw  2       ee Carousel  2                                Control Panel    ___    Front        __  Guide Shaft  2              _    Executive PCBA  2        Carriage  Handler  Gripper    7     and Barcode Reader  2           Supporting    Guide Shaft  2  Carousel Motor  2     SCSI Connectors  E a  rat    Power Switch      BE  Tape Drive PCBA  4      Fuse          Carousel PCBA  2                             Shuttle Assembly    Vertical  Y  Axis     1 T  Lead Screw  2                 Rear Guide Shaft  2           pena         AC Power Receptacle                                                 Blower                Front Rear    Vertical  Y  Axis Tape Drives  8  Maximum  Home Sensor Probe  2     Tape Drive Power Supplies  4     Y Clear Emitter Assembly  4     Figure 7 5 Dual Bay TLS Side View    7 5 1 Carriage Assembly Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Remove the Top Panel as described in Section 7 4 1     3  Use a 7 64 inch Allen wrench to remove both socket head Carriage Cable Clamp  mounting screws  Figure 7 6      4  Manually raise the Carriage Assembly up sufficiently to expose the ribbon cable  connector on the underside     7 10 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    5  Disconnect the Carriage Assembly s double ribbon cable connector by pushing  outwards on both ejectors  located on the end of the connector   Set the cable to  the right     6  Lower the carriage to the bott
85. Lock    Follow the instructions in Section 5 2 to disable the Master Security Lock     Entering the Password    Follow the instructions in Sections 5 3 1 to enter the Update password     Editing the BCR Value    NOTE    If the TLS is restricted  it may not be possible to change the BCR value in the Configura     tion Advanced Changer Mechanics menu  See Section 5 1 for details about re   stricted units        Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu  The pointer in the left margin of  the LCD should be pointing to Configuration     Press the Enter key to enter the Configuration menu   Press the Enter key to enter the Configuration Advanced menu     Press the Enter key to enter the Configuration Advanced Changer  menu     TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    10     11     12     Press the VW  DOWN  key repeatedly to move the pointer to Mechanics     Press the Enter key to enter the  Configuration Advanced Changer Mechanics menu     Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to BCR   Open the cabinet door to defeat the DOOR security lock     Press the Enter key to begin editing the BCR value        Press the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key to change the BCR value from NONE to TLS   WA3700 B 2221     Close the cabinet door     Press the MENU key to return to the Top Menu     9 3 2 5 Clearing the Password       Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 3 to execute the Private menu s CLEAR AC     C       ESS command  to remove the password  Update  and prevent unauthorized access    to the Privat
86. Lock  then repeat this section to set  the desired password        The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    13     14     15     Press the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key repeatedly to select the desired character  be  sure to use the correct case letters   then press the ENTER key once to shift the  flashing cursor to the next character position     Repeat step 12 to finish entering the password     Press the EXIT key to set the password     5 3 3 Clearing the Password    501090 Rev  F    Clearing  removing  the current password prevents unauthorized personnel from ac   cessing the Private menu and accidentally disabling the TLS  The current pass   word should always be removed after the service technician finishes using    the Private menu     Three things happen when a user clears the password     1     2     3     4     5     6     Private disappears from the Top Menu   Access reappears in the Private menu     CLEAR ACCESS  shown in Section 5 3 3  disappears from the Private  menu     Press the MENU key to open the Top Menu   Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Private     Press the ENTER key to enter the Private menu     ee eee eeeeeeeePrivate     Blower   eCalibration  eCalibration Left  eCalibration Right  CALIBRATE  Carousel   CLEAR ACCESS   Configuration  Display A D  Display Locations  Display Positions  Display Sensors  DriveBay  Executive   ESET SCSI BUS                            Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to CLEAR ACCESS   Press the ENTER key to execute th
87. MEIDEN  WECHSELN  SIE KEINEN LUFTFILTER WAHREND DER STROM DES TLS EINGESCHALTET IST   SOBALD DER LUFTFILTER ENTFERNT WURDE  IST NICHTS MEHR  VORHANDEN  DAS VOR DEM VERSEHENTLICHEN KONTAKT MIT DEN  VENTILATORENBLATTERN SCHUTZT        NOTICE    Never try to clean and reuse an old air filter  When you install new air fil   ters  or reinstall ones that are not yet dirty enough to be replaced  be sure to    install them with the arrows on the edge of the filter   s frame pointing into  the cabinet        Refer to Figure 7 24   1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the four quarter turn fasteners on the large  Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise     3  Remove the large Air Filter Clamp from the TLS     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F                                  Quarter turn Fasteners  4           o   om                                                                             Small Air Filter Clamp       with 1 Air Filter Element                                                                            Air Filter Elements  2  Harve  Air Filler ctamp    Figure 7 24 TLS Rear View     Dual Bay Model    10     11     501090 Rev  F    Remove the two air filters     Replace the old air filters with new ones or reinstall the old ones if they are not  yet dirty enough to be replaced  Never try to clean and reuse an old air filter  If  old air filters are being reinstalled  make sure that the side that was facin
88. N 732 0003 2  Latex Glove    IMPORTANT   Leadscrew lubricant and a latex glove are required  during Carriage Assembly replacement        Table 7 3 Replacement Materials    7 4 Top and Side Panels    Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver or Wrench          FRONT BACK 3 FRONT    a7                         A B    Hay Wadd       TOP TOP  Note   FRONT Larger units have FRONT  several screws in  LEFT SIDE this Baer edge  LEFT SIDE   Top Panel Removed   Top Panel Removed                 ttt tt c itttt    Figure 7 1 Top and Side Panels     Single Bay Model Shown    7 4 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    see eet                   Back  Top    _    Top  Front     Front     _     tttttt tttttt  Right Side Left Side   Top Panel Removed   Top Panel Removed     Figure 7 2 Top and Side Panels     Dual Bay Model Shown    7 4 1 Top Panel Removal    1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    Open the cabinet door    Remove the screws from the front of the Top Panel  Figure 7 1A and Figure 7 2A    Remove the screws from the back of the Top Panel  Figure 7 1A and Figure 7 2A      Lift the Top Panel off of the TLS     7 4 2 Top Panel Replacement    501090 Rev  F    1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Open the cabinet door     Place the Top Panel on the TLS with the scalloped edge facing the front   Figure 7 1A and Figure 7 2A      Reinstall the screws removed in Section 7 4 1  step 3   Reinstal
89. Nuts  2              Front Panel Display       Lower Mounting Nuts  4     Figure 7 31 The Switch Bracket Assembly  Front Panel     7 12 1 Switch Bracket Assembly Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Open the cabinet door     NOTE    In the next step  the spacers behind the Switch Bracket Assembly come loose when the mount     ing nuts are removed        3  Remove all six mounting nuts from the Switch Bracket Assembly mounting  studs using a 1 4   inch nutdriver  Figure 7 31      501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 43    Nylon Cable Tie Pair   Behind the LCD     Display Cable    Colored Stripe    Lift the Switch Bracket Assembly off of the mounting studs  Be careful not to  drop the spacers     Reinstall all six mounting nuts onto the mounting studs to retain the spacers     Clip the Nylon Cable Ties  8 pairs of ties  mounted around the ribbon cable   Figure 7 32   then remove them completely     Unplug the ribbon cable from the FRONT connector on the Front Panel PCBA   Figure 7 32               Nylon Cable Tie Pair       Switch Bracket Assembly    Switch Bracket  Front   Ribbon Cable    Nylon Cable Tie Pair   Just above where Display  Cable connects to PCBA     Front Panel PCBA       FRONT Connector             Figure 7 32 Switch Bracket Assembly  Rear View     7 12 2 Switch Bracket Assembly Replacement    1     7 44    Plug the Switch Bracket Ribbon Cable into the FRONT connector on the Front  Panel PCBA  Figure 7 32   Make sure 
90. O port assembly from the inside of the TLS with one hand  then  remove all six I O port mounting screws from the top of the TLS using a number  2 Phillips screwdriver  Figure 7 28      7  Gently move the I O port assembly back about one inch toward the rear of the  TLS  until the Call switch clears the TLS    frame  then lower the I O port assem   bly and remove it through the front of the TLS     7 10 2 I O Port Assembly Replacement  CAUTION    The unit must be recalibrated after the I O port assembly is replaced in the TLS     NOTE    TLS 5000 and 58xxx models will only function correctly with 501195 02 8 Revision B  or later   I O port assemblies  Read the I O port assembly label  see Figure 7 30  and look for the text      I O Port  B    or later     If you remove the Right side Panel  Section 7 4 3   the holes in the side of the TLS    frame give  easy access to the I O port cable s plug     On dual bay models  removing any magazines that are mounted on the top row of the right side  carousel will also allow for easier access to the I O port assembly        7 40 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Gently turn the I O port leadscrew by hand to position the I O port slot in the  middle of the I O port assembly  so that it will clear the Magazine when the as   sembly is installed in the library  Figure 2 10      3  Insert the I O port assembly through the open cabinet door     4  Make sure that the LED
91. PSON MICROELECTRONICS M48258X IC AUF DEM EXECUTIVE  BOARD ENTHAELT EINE INTEGRIERTE LITHIUM BATTERIE  WENN DIESE  UNSACHGEMAESS AUSGETAUSCHT WIRD  BESTEHT EXPLOSIONS GEFAHR     DER IC DARF NUR DURCH EINEN ARTIKEL MIT DER SELBEN ARTIKELNUMMER   BZW  MIT EINEM VERGLEICHBAREN ARTIKEL LAUT HERSTELLER ANGABE  ERSETZT WERDEN  DIE ENTSORGUNG DES ALTEN IC   S DARF NUR GEMAESS  HERSTELLERANGABEN ERFOLGEN           501090 Rev  F    Introduction    1 3    2  Description and Theory of Operation    2 1 Model Identification                                                                         mjm   oo  00                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                yy  Cc ae  556  Ee Ye    Jl   oe     6110 6210  6220 5433  5466 58132  58264   8111 8211  8222 6430  6460 68120  68240   8433  8466 88132  88264    Figure 2 1 TLS 5000 6000 8000 Models    TLS 5000 Feature Model 5433   5466   58132   58264  ea e fe fs fo    Media capacity in cartridges   11 cartridges per magazine     Barcode Reader s oar fe    I O Port for automated cartridge  insertion removal   Carousel s    rotary pstioning of magazines     meaa  PDP   tink Renete Manager  ost  ont  ont  ont       Table 2 1 SAIT based TLS 5000 Features    501090 Rev  F Description and Theory of Operatio
92. Send File 21x     Folder  C 4700105 501138 388 Executive Firmware   Filename     700 04209 Browse       Protocol      xmodem x   Close   Cancel      Figure 8 14 Send File Screen Under Transfer       8 12 Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    8 4 7 Procedure for Replacing the Flash Memory IC on Executive II  III or IV                 Boards  1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all six Rear Service Panel mount   ing screws  then remove the Rear Service Panel  Figure 8 15        gt  eee  lt  lt      Mounting       Screws  6   4      of 4     Right Side     ie Left Side    behind this Service Panel    behind this Service Panel    Executive PCBA is  gt  l 3 Executive PCBA is                                                                      e e    e                Single Bay Library Dual Bay Library    Figure 8 15 Rear Service Panels    501090 Rev  F    Remove the Flash Memory IC at U4  the Part Number is 700105 or 700115  from  the Executive PCBA using a flat blade screwdriver or equivalent tool  Note the  IC location  U number  is identical on Executive II  III and IV boards  Pry the IC  from either end slightly and repeat for the other end  Be careful not to bend the  legs of the IC  Continue this procedure until the part is loosened enough to be  removed by hand  Refer to Figure 8 16     Install the new 700105 or 700115 Flash Memory IC at U4  Note the orientation  of pin 1  Make certain that all pins are fully i
93. T4000 or DLT7000     5 4 14 2 The Private DriveBay  T  Information Menu    501090 Rev  F    PD  T    Information  Compression OFF  Needs Cleaning  NO  Write Protect  NO  CleanUses xXxXXXXXXX  PwrOnHour XXXXXXXX    CleanHour XXXXXXXX    TapeRmain xxXxXXXXXX   Temp Inside  ddd  Temp Outside  ddd  12V  ddd  5V  ddd  Lost Replies ddddd          Compression  ON OFF   When the Compression value is ON  data is being written to the tape drive using a  compression algorithm or utility     Needs Cleaning  YES NO    When the Needs Cleaning value is YES  the tape drive needs to have a cleaning op   eration performed  Refer to the TLS 5000 6000 800 Installation and Operation  Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more information on tape drive  cleaning procedures     Write Protect  YES NO   When the Write Protect value is YES  the tape cartridge in the tape drive is write   protected  which will protect the data from being altered or overwritten     CleanUses  The CleanUses value represents the number of times that the tape drive has been  cleaned using a cleaning cartridge     PwrOnHour  The PwrOnHour value represents the amount of time that the tape drive has been  powered on     CleanHour  The CleanHour value represents the amount of time that a cleaning cartridge has  been used to clean the tape drive     TapeRmain  The TapeRmain value represents the amount of tape that is left on the cartridge  that is in the tape drive     Temp Inside  The Temp Inside value represents the te
94. The cable from the Executive PCBA to the I O port PCBA is damaged or discon   nected     2  The I O port motor cable is damaged or disconnected   3  The unit is configured for an I O port  but no I O port is installed   4  The I O port motor has failed     5  The Executive PCBA is damaged     6 1 12 When the power is turned on  the alert loport Jammed appears on the    control panel display  and you do hear a whining sound for several sec   onds before the alert occurs     During the power up sequence  the I O port is driven back to its home position  If the  motor is operating but the I O port is not moving  it will make a loud buzzing sound   This condition indicates one of the following causes     1  The I O port mechanism is binding  due to misalignment of the guides     2  The Carriage is parked in front of the I O port  with a cartridge that is still in the  I O port slot engaging the grippers on the Handler     3  The metal vane on the I O port carriage is not obstructing the light beam of the  T O port home sensor     4  The I O port home sensor opto interrupter pair is bent or damaged     5  The I O port mechanism is jammed  due to a mechanical obstruction  or it is  binding against a stop     6  The I O port mechanism is binding  because the leadscrew shaft coupling was set  with too much compression     Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    6 1 13    6 1 14    6 1 15    7  The Shaft Coupling between the I O port motor and the leadscrew is not clamped  properly  This cas
95. a key is released  a problem with a  control key switch or the keypad ground connection may exist  In this case  please re   fer to Chapter 6 of this manual for additional troubleshooting information     4 11 Maintenance Test LC Display Status Screen       M     Test LC Display  IVH SSEl           0123456789     lt   gt     ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO                                  M    Test LC Display  PORSTUVWXYZ    _     abcdefghijkimno  pqrstuvwxyz                                    This screen blinks                displays as a right pointing arrow       displays as a left pointing arrow      displays as a Yen symbol    The TLS uses a four line Liquid Crystal Display that displays 20 characters per line   This status screen uses three different test screens to check the operation of the dis   play  After selecting the Maintenance Test LC Display screen  use either the A  UP   or V  DOWN  key to select any one of the three test screens     The first two test screens display the character set used by the TLS  The third test  screen checks the operation of all display pixels  by turning them all on or all off at  the same time  the screen blinks   When all of the pixels are turned on  the user  should see four lines of 20 solid rectangles each  When all of the pixels are turned off   all four lines should be blank     Press the EXIT key to return to the Maintenance menu     501090 Rev  F Maintenance Menu 4 11    5  The Private Menu       Access  22272222722                    LEGEND
96. a tape into the occupied drive  After it fails to insert the tape into  the occupied drive  the library will put the tape back where it came from  and update  the inventory information to show that the drive is occupied     A Barcode Reader does not read any bar code labels     The library uses the Code 3 of 9  also known as code 39  barcode format for the car   tridge labels  In the default configuration  a check character is expected  This can be  altered in the configuration  If the library is configured for a check character  and  none is present on the labels  then the library will be unable to read the labels  If the  library is configured for no check character  and there are check characters on the la   bel  the library will interpret the check character as an additional character  and you  will see one extra character in the element label reported on the SCSI bus or in the  menus     Possible causes     1  The barcode labels are printed in a code that the library configuration does not  understand     2  The configuration is set to the wrong type of barcode reader     3  The Configuration Advanced Changer LabelCheckChar  label check character   option is not set correctly     4  The lens on the face of a bar code reader is not clean   5  The barcode labels are not of a high enough quality for reliable reading     6  The bar code reader has failed     Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    7  The barcode labels are dirty or damaged     6 2 4 A Barcode Reader does not read b
97. able  are avail   able from a number of sources including Qualstar     Barcode labels must conform to ANSI AIM BCI 1995  Uniform Symbology Specifica   tion Code 39  Please refer to PIN 040 at www qualstar com  click on Support tab  for  more information     By default  the TLS expects a modulus 43 check character at the end of each label   The use of a check character helps assure that labels are read error free  The TLS con   figuration must be changed before using barcode labels without a check character  All  of the labels within the TLS must match the check character configuration  either all  with or all without a check character     Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    2 2 6 Barcode Label Usage    If the library contains a barcode reader  and barcode labels are affixed to the car   tridges   when barcode information is read  it is stored as part of the inventory data   base in the library s non volatile RAM  and is available to the host computer upon re   quest  When the changer moves a cartridge  the inventory database is updated to re   flect the change     If the changer   s inventory becomes invalid  e g  if the Inventory Sentry Beam is vio   lated   the changer rescans the inventory  The updated barcode label and cartridge  position data is then stored in the inventory database  Example  After an alert that  invalidates the inventory  e g   when a cartridge is moved by hand  is cleared  the  changer rescans the inventory  Any existing barcode labels
98. ack wires in the library that were cut in Step 8 of Section 7 8 2     8  Insert the Fan Assembly into the TLS through the front opening  with the red  and black wires pointing down     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 27    9  Fully insert the end of the red wire into the Butt Splice that is attached to the  red wire of the Fan Assembly  Use a wire crimper to secure the wire in the Butt  Splice  See Figure 7 19     10  Repeat step 9 for the black wire     11  Align the Fan Assembly s mounting screw holes with the mounting screw holes  in the TLS and then install the Fan Assembly mounting screws  Thread the nuts  on to the mounting screws and then tighten the Fan Assembly mounting screws   See Figure 7 17     12  Replace any cable ties and or cable wraps that were removed when accessing the  Fan Assemblies wires     13  Reinstall the air filter  or install a new one   If an old air filter is being rein   stalled  make sure that the side that was facing the inside of the library is placed  in the same direction as it was when it was removed  Reversing the direction of  an old air filter may cause dirt to be transferred into the library     14  Replace the Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the quarter turn fastener  clockwise  Figure 7 16      15  Reinstall the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4   then reinstall the Top Panel   Section 7 4 2      Butt Splice    24 AWG Wire  Fully Inserted  Into Butt Splice    1 4    of Insulation  Removed    24 AWG Wire     
99. ailed  or the cable to the Executive PCBA is  disconnected or damaged     The LCD display has failed  or the LCD display cable is disconnected or dam   aged     When the power is turned on  the Handler s  moves normally and the  control panel display illuminates  but it does not show text     Possible causes     1     The LCD display cable is not properly connected  or the cable is damaged     Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    2     The LCD display has failed     6 1 8   When the power is turned on  the alert Bcr Failure appears in the control  panel display     On power up  the library attempts to communicate with the bar code reader mod     ule s   If the library is configured for a bar code reader  but this communication fails     this error results     Possible causes     1     2     A Barcode Reader is not plugged into the Carriage PCBA     The unit is configured for a Barcode Reader  but a Barcode Reader is not in   stalled     The cable connecting an Executive PCBA to the Carriage PCBA is damaged  or  not properly connected     A Barcode Reader has failed   A Carriage PCBA has failed    An Executive PCBA has failed     6 1 9  When the power is turned on  the alert Yhome Fail appears on the con   trol panel display  and a Carriage does not reach the bottom of its verti   cal travel     When the power is turned on  the library attempts to drive the carriage s  to the bot     tom of the machine  then verifies that the Y home sensors detect the carriage s   This    error re
100. ar code labels reliably     The library uses the Code 3 of 9  also know as code 39  barcode format for the car   tridge labels  In the default configuration  a check character is expected  This can be  altered in the configuration  If the library is configured for a check character  and  none is present on the labels  then the library will be unable to read the labels  If the  library is configured for no check character  and there are check characters on the la   bel  the library will interpret the check character as an additional character  and you  will see one extra character in the element label reported on the SCSI bus or in the  menus     Possible causes   1  The barcode labels are not of a high enough quality for reliable reading   2  The barcode labels are dirty or damaged     3  The barcode labels are printed in a code that the library configuration does not  understand     4  The lens on the face of a barcode reader is not clean   5  The configuration is set to the wrong type of barcode reader   6  The barcode reader has failed     7  The Configuration Advanced Changer LabelCheckChar  label check character   option is not set correctly     6 2 5 When the library takes an inventory and reads the barcode labels  it  scans the tapes without barcode labels repeatedly     The library can be configured to make several attempts to read a label with the bar   code reader s   if it cannot read the label the first attempt  If the library is configured  this way  and no label
101. arousel  X  axis mo   tors     e IS  I O Port or Shuttle   On the right side  this value indicates the current I O port carrier position  A value  of zero means that the I O port slot is at its home position  fully retracted   On the  left side  it indicates the value of the Shuttle position  The Shuttle position will be  negative when at its left  home position     e X  This value indicates the current Carousel position  A value of 0 means that the  Carousel is at its home position  face 1      e Y  This value indicates the current vertical position of the Carriage  A value of 0  means that the Carriage is at its home position  at the bottom of its travel range      e Period Y  Used primarily for diagnostics  this value represents the period of time that it takes  for the Hall Effect sensors in the Y axis brushless DC motor to move between two  points  The maximum value of 65 535 will be shown when the motor is not moving     e Z  This value indicates the current position of the Handler s Gripper  A value of 0  means that the Handler s Gripper is in its home position  fully retracted      e PeriodZ  Used primarily for diagnostics  this value represents the period of time that it takes  for the Hall Effect sensors in the Z axis brushless DC motor to move between two  points  The maximum value of 65 535 will be shown when the motor is not moving     5 20 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    5 4 13 The Private Display Sensors Status Screen    P    Display Sensors     Left    Adapt
102. artridge in the I O port slot     Handler Solenoid    A solenoid   operated Gripper Assembly is mounted on each Handler for grasping and  releasing cartridges  When current is applied to the solenoid s windings  the solenoid s  plunger extends  opening the Gripper  When the current is removed  a spring closes  the Gripper  The solenoid plunger s tip is covered with a wear resistant nosepiece to  provide extended life     Barcode Reader    A barcode reader for each carriage is standard on TLS 58xxx  68xxx an 88xxx models   For single bay libraries  a barcode reader is standard on models TLS 54xx  64xx and  TLS 84xx  and optional on the others  They are intended for use in systems where  each cartridge is identified by a barcode label  Pre printed barcode labels  which are  both human  and machine readable  are available from a number of sources  including  Qualstar     The barcode reader consists of a charge coupled sensor  similar to those used in video  cameras  and associated electronics  They are mounted under the carriages  The bar   code readers can scan all cartridges in the TLS  except those loaded inside LTO tape  drives   as well as cartridges introduced into the I O port     NOTE    The changer automatically moves a cartridge in the I O port slot  to a temporary location where    its barcode label can be scanned  The changer then returns the cartridge to its original location        Barcode Labels    Pre printed barcode labels  which are both human  and machine read
103. assembly   I O Port Axis Motor I O Port Slot Note  The LED   s Cable Plug    is located under the   O Port PCBA           1 0 Port Lead Screw      I O Port          tn Assembly Label                                                                      Motor Cable Plug       O Port Door                                                       I O Port Cable Plug 8 PCBA    Mounting Nuts    I O Port PCBA    Bottom View    Figure 7 30 1 O Port Assembly    7 11 2 I O Port PCBA Replacement    This procedure assumes that the I O port PCBA was removed in Section 7 11 1    1  If necessary  gently turn the I O port leadscrew by hand  to move the I O port  slot away from the eight PCBA mounting screws holes in the I O port assembly s  frame  Figure 7 30      2  Lower the I O port PCBA into the I O port assembly and install all eight PCBA  mounting nuts  Figure 7 30      3  Connect the MOTOR cable to the I O port PCBA  Figure 7 30   Note that the  connector is keyed for correct orientation     4  Turn the I O port assembly over and connect the LEDs cable  Note that the con   nector is keyed for correct orientation     5  Reinstall the I O port assembly  Section 7 10 2      6  Recalibrate the TLS   See Section 5 3 2 for details      7 42 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 12 Switch Bracket Assembly  Front Panel   P N 500815 01 4    Tools and Material Required     e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver or Wrench    e 3 inch x 3 32 inch Cable Ties    Spring Finger              Top Mounting 
104. at a cartridge has been removed from a drive or  storage location     e Places  This value is the number of times that a cartridge has been placed into a drive or  storage location     e PowerOn  This value is the number of times that the power has been turned on     e Resets  This value is the number of Executive CPU resets  including power on resets and  SCSI bus resets    e S Cmnds    This value is the number of SCSI commands received by the TLS     Maintenance Menu 501090 Rev  F    e X Moves  This value is the number of carousel movements     e X Steps  This value is the number of X   Axis  carousel  motor steps  3200 steps revolution      e Y Moves  This value is the number of vertical Y   Axis  up down  cartridge Handler move   ments   Note that some movements can be very small      e Y Steps  This value is the number of Y   Axis motor commutations  24 revolution      e Z Moves  This value is the number of Z   Axis  in out  cartridge Handler movements     e Z Steps  This value is the number of Z   Axis motor commutations  24 revolution  120 inch      4 7 Maintenance Display Stats   Left or Right  Status Screen    dddddddddd    dddddddddd    dddddddddd    dddddddddd      dddddddddd    dddddddddd    dddddddddd    dddddddddd    dddddddddd       These are two identical menus for displaying a summary of the left or right side spe   cific events in dual bay libraries that have occurred since the TLS was built  Only the  left display text is shown  The right text is quite simi
105. bottom edge of the Executive PCBA into the Rear Panel opening     Lower the Executive PCBA to align all four Mounting Stud holes in the PCBA  with all four PCBA mounting studs  then install the PCBA onto the studs     Reinstall all four PCBA mounting nuts  with lockwashers  onto the mounting  studs  then use a 1 4   inch nutdriver to tighten the mounting nuts firmly against  the Executive PCBA     Reinstall all four Phillips mounting screws in the Heat Sink Flanges  then use a  number 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the mounting screws until they are snug     Reconnect all the remaining cables to the Executive PCBA    a  For each ribbon cable  press the ribbon cable   s connector firmly into its mating  connector  until both locking tabs on the mating connector close over the ribbon  cable   s connector     b  For each non   ribbon cable  make sure that all of the pins on the cable   s con   nector are fully engaged with the corresponding mating connector     c  The remaining cables include     e CAROSL  Carousel   e PWRDST    e SERIAL  Executive II and III PCBA   s only   Connect this cable so that the stripe on the ribbon cable is on the right  side of the SERIAL connector  as shown below     SERIALo                 SERIAL Connector    Stripe                      a    e SE LVD or LVD SE  a  If a HVD Adapter PCBA is not installed on the replacement Execu   tive PCBA  connect the SCSI cable to the SE LVD connector on the Ex   ecutive PCBA  the bottom SCSI connector in Figur
106. bove  is the forward direction of rotation   position step increments      Face   Face Number on Model    on Model    Face Number on Mode         SE 6220 5433 5466 Nominal  8222 6430 6460 Position  8433 8466    e e Se a   o 2   27    e e e o  o5              3   as   E E Sr   S60    4  X  N    i    X   between faces    x lt        Table 5 1 Single Bay Carousel Rotation Information    501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 13    Face Number  on Model     Nominal  Position       X   between faces    Table 5 2 Dual Bay Carousel Rotation Information    5 14    The Carousel menu contains the following values     Current Stop   This value is the current Stop number  Table 5 1 or Table 5 2   A value of 255 indi   cates that the carousel is between Stops  or that the Carousel has been bumped off  of a Stop     Demand Stop  Set this value prior to commanding the carousel to rotate  The Carousel rotates to  this Stop number when the SLEW command is invoked     ABORT SLEW  This command will immediately stop Carousel rotation     SLEW   This command will start the Carousel rotating to the Demand Stop position  The  direction of rotation for the shortest movement will be used  No rotation occurs if  the Current Stop number is equal to the Demand Stop number     Current Pos    This value indicates the Carousel s current position in motor steps  Table 5 1    Normally the number is always positive and wraps around from 3199 to 0  But if  the user steps below zero  a negative number is displayed   
107. cecesssececcesseececesseaceceeseaceceeseeeeceeeeeaeeeeseeaaeees 7 23  7 7 2 Barcode Reader Replacement           ccccccccccccccccceccceeeeeesecececececececececececececececeeaeaeaeaes 7 23  7 8 Air Filter and Fan Assembly              cccccccccssssssececececeessssececececeesesssssseeececesesenssssaeeesess 7 24  7 8 1 Air Filter Removal Replacement  0           cccccssssscececeeescsesssseceeeceesesessseeeeeeeeseneenens 7 24  7 8 2 Fan Assembly Removal for 6110  62xx  8111 and 82xx Models                 ccceeeees 7 26  7 8 3 Fan Assembly Replacement for 6110  62xx  8111 and 82xx Models                   7 27  7 8 4 Fan Assembly Removal for 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models            cccccccccccceeseessrees 7 29  7 8 5 Fan Assembly Replacement for 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models              cccceeeeseeees 7 31  7 9 Air Filters and Blower Assembly   0           cccccssscccccceceesessececececeesesssseseeeceeseeeesensaaeeeeess 7 34  7 9 1 Air Filter Removal Replacement  0           cccccssssscecececeeeeesssseceeeeeesesessaseeeeeseseneeneas 7 34  7 9 2 Blower Assembly Removal             ccccccccccccscessessessececececeesensseceeececsessstsaasaeeesecseneeas 7 36  7 9 3 Blower Assembly Replacement                 ccccccsssssscecececeeceesssseceeeeeesesssssseeeeeeeeesesenees 7 37  7 10 VO  Port Assembly sce sccecceeh Ges sessed Sees eld ASAE A a IR AEE 7 38  7 10 1 T O Port Assembly Removall          cccccccccccccccessssssceeecececeesesssaseceeeeeeeesenssaeeeeeeeesenensaes 7 40  7 10 2 I O Port
108. cers are in place on the PCBA  mounting studs     4  Align the PCBA with the two mounting studs  then install the PCBA onto the  studs  Reinstall the two mounting nuts onto the mounting studs  then use a 1 4     inch nutdriver to tighten the mounting nuts firmly against the PCBA  Reconnect  the RIGHT connector and replace the cable tie that was removed earlier  Figure  7 83   Make sure that the cable ties and the cable tie mounts do not interfere  with the shuttle   s travel     5  Reinstall the Shuttle Assembly  see Section 7 22 2 for details      6  Recalibrate the TLS  see Section 5 3 2 for details      7 108 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 24 Y Clear Detector PCBA    P N 501307 01 1  TLS 6110 and TLS 8111 libraries contain a Y Clear Detector PCBA     In addition to the Y Clear Detectors that are mounted on the I O port assembly  TLS   58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  libraries contain a Y Clear Detector PCBA     Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    7 24 1 Y Clear Detector PCBA Removal                  Ribbon Cable  a       IOPORT Connector sae    Y Clear Detector PCBA    i             So E                Front    Mounting Screws  3     Figure 7 84 Y Clear PCBA on Top of TLS  Dual Bay Model Shown     1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      3  Disconnect the ribbon cable at the IOPORT Connector  Figure 7 84      NOTE    In this next step  the spacers under the Y Clear Detector PC
109. compensate for mechanical variations  This fault indicates that the library was unable    to calibrate one of the slots  Observe which slot the carriage is sitting in front of  This  is the calibration location referred to below     6 16 Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    501090 Rev  F    Possible causes     There is no magazine present in the calibration location  and it is a magazine lo     cation  Place a magazine in this position and try again     There is a cartridge in the magazine in the calibration location  Remove the car   tridge and try again     The magazine in the calibration location is not properly seated     An Insertion Axis  Z Axis  is not free to travel to its forward stop  Turn the lead  screw with your fingers and insure it is free to travel stop to stop     An Insertion Axis does not run smoothly     The machine is not assembled correctly  If the unit was just expanded or up   graded  double check that the new features are mounted in the correct holes     The machine is configured as the wrong model  Check that the model and other  configuration information is set correctly  You can freely add and remove tape  drives from the configuration with no affect on the calibration     Troubleshooting    6 17    7s    Field Replaceable Units  FRUs     DANGER    TO AVOID THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY     TURN OFF ALL POWER TO THE TAPE LIBRARY SYSTEM  THEN REMOVE THE  POWER CORD  BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS    CHAPTER     NEVER OPERATE THE LIBRARY W
110. control panel display remains dark and   SHOWS NO TEXT cast aevc tac E NETE EEE a EEEN ae 6 1 5  The Handlers move normally  the control panel display shows text  but the   control panel display remains dark                 cccceceseeseseseeeeeeeeseeeeeecececeeseseseseseseeeees 6 1 6  The Handlers move normally and the control panel display illuminates  but it   does not show terta raorto ea a a ade E ar aa dv pedestal  6 1 7  The alert Bcr Failure appears in the control panel display                 cccc sceseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 8  The alert Yhome Fail appears on the control panel display  and a Carriage   does not reach the bottom of its vertical travel          ccccccccceessececeesteceesesteeeeeseaes 6 1 9  The alert YHome Fail appears on the control panel display  after the Carriages   reach the bottom of their vertical travel           cccccccssscccesssceeesesseeeeeesteeeeessteeeeees 6 1 10  The alert Ioport Jammed appears on the control panel display  and you do   not hear a whining sound for several seconds before the alert occurs               6 1 11  The alert Ioport Jammed appears on the control panel display  and you do   hear a whining sound for several seconds before the alert occurs               0006 6 1 12  The message Needs Calibration appears on the control panel display                   6 1 13    The alert Carousel Jammed appears on the control panel display  and a  Carousel motor does not rotate or make any NOISE            ccccsccccecseceseesssseceeeseees 
111. crew Motor Nut  Figure 7 9      Thin metal spacer on end of Leadscrew     Gum Lower this end into the cabinet        E AE he F he af de JOR Te OP fed    i a an  de fod T f      Ed       pe fp     f   a  a    LS Ap Lode Soff Po pe Ale    Figure 7 12 The Carriage Assembly Leadscrew    7 16    11  Make sure that the thin metal spacer is positioned on the end of the Leadscrew   See Figure 7 12     12  Gently lower the Carriage Assembly back down onto the bottom plate     13  Manually rotate the Leadscrew clockwise  as seen from the top of the TLS  until  you feel resistance to further rotation  This resistance indicates that the Lead   screw is fully inserted into the hole in the bottom plate     Steps 14 and 15 apply to single bay libraries only     14  Lay the TLS on its left side  as seen from the front  to gain access to the bottom  Leadscrew retaining screw     15  Apply one drop of Loctite 242 to the threads on the Leadscrew retaining screw  a  10 32 x 3 8 inch Button Head Socket Cap screw   then insert the screw through  the bottom plate and into the threaded end of the Leadscrew  Firmly tighten the    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    screw with a 1 8 inch Allen wrench  Stand the TLS upright on its feet and pro   ceed to step 18     Steps 16 and 17 apply to dual bay libraries only     16     17     Using a small mirror and a small flashlight if needed  locate the bottom Lead   screw retaining screw hole on the bottom of the TLS  Figure 7 8      Apply one d
112. crews  3     Barcode Reader  Cable       9 13    9 3 2 1    9 3 2 2    9 3 2 3    9 3 2 4    9 14    Installing the Barcode Reader Hardware    Refer to Figure 9 10     1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     It may be necessary to manually lower or raise the Carriage Assembly so that it  is approximately 6 inches from the top of its vertical range of motion  Gently  grasp the Carriage Assembly and lift it  or push down  to move it     Position the Barcode Reader under the Carriage Assembly  with the mounting  holes in the Mounting Plate facing up  and the Barcode Reader   s cable jack fac   ing the cabinet door     Align the mounting screw holes in the Barcode Reader Mounting Plate with the  mounting screw holes in the Carriage Assembly     Install all three 4 40 x 1 4 inch pan head Barcode Reader Mounting Plate  screws  Use a number 1 Phillips screwdriver to securely tighten the mounting  screws     If the supplied cable is not already connected to the Barcode Reader  connect it to  the cable jack on the rear of the Barcode Reader  The cable   s connector is keyed   but make certain that all pins are engaged     Connect the Barcode Reader cable to the BCR connector on the underside of the  Carriage Assembly  Figure 9 10   The cable   s connector is keyed  but make cer   tain that all pins are engaged   It may be necessary to manually lift the Carriage  Assembly to see the BCR connector on the Carriage Assembly PCBA      Disabling the Master Security 
113. csesenssaees 7 51  7 13 6 Dual Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement                 ccccccceseessessceeeseceeeenssees 7 54  7 14 Blower  Power Sup plyewiss ceeisasc ces ved eink ace ete Secs oy a oveasbe a duvdsede cots seducveiQheceess 7 55  7 14 1 Blower Power Supply Removal               ccccsssssscecececeessesssseceeceecsesessseeseeeseseneeneas 7 55  7 14 2 Blower Power Supply Replacement               ccccccccccccessessssecceceeeceesensnssceeesecseeentaaees 7 56  7 15 Tape Drive Power Supply         ccccccccccccccccesssssceccesececsesesssaeeececsesensnssaeeeseceecsenensaaeees 7 57  7 15 1 Tape Drive Power Supply Removal              cccccccccccccessesessecceeeeeeeesensnssseeeseeseeentaaees 7 58  7 15 2 Tape Drive Power Supply Replacement               cccecccsessscccececeeeeesssseceeeseeseeensaees 7 60  7 16 Exec  tiye PCBA ciacccisccicssectiviesssocdsckesseencdivseuesds ESTAA SE Eh 7 60  7 16 1 Executive POBA Removal ea aa aaeoa rna a Epa a E adoa Ea Ea E aatar aatia 7 61  7 16 2 Executive PCBA Replacement         ssssssessssssseseseesssssssssesessrsssseserrosesssseseoersessssssseses 7 63  7 16 3 Reconfiguring the TES apaga eene ani n aea AE a aiea ae Ea Aa EEEIEE EEA 7 66  7 16 4  Re  alibr  tine the TLS macra aa aa kad Wedd aa Ae iaeiae eke 7 69  7 17 Drive Bay POBA a EA AO E Ena a e a a e 7 69  7 17 1 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 6110 and 8111 Models 00 0 0    ccceeccececcceeeeeeeerseeees 7 70  7 17 2 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 6110 and 8111 Models            ccceecseseece
114. ctor oo             paN               Blower Mounting Screws  5     Blower Ribbon Cable    Figure 7 26 Blower Assembly    7 9 3 Blower Assembly Replacement    501090 Rev  F    1     Insert the Blower Assembly through the front opening on the right side of the li   brary  Carefully maneuver the Blower Assembly between the right side Support   ing Guide Shaft and the center support  See Figure 7 27     Align the five Blower Assembly   s mounting screw holes with the corresponding  holes in the library     Using a long bladed Phillips screwdriver  reinstall the five Blower mounting  screws that were removed earlier     Plug the Blower ribbon cable into the D BAY 0 connector on the lower Drive Bay  PCBA  See Figure 7 26  Note that the connector is keyed     Plug the Power cable into the POWER connector on the Blower PCBA  See  Figure 7 26     Insert the Blower Guard Screen through the front opening of the library and  align it   s six mounting screw holes with the six mounting tabs located between  the drive bays     Use a Phillips screwdriver to reinstall all six screws that were removed earlier     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 37       il    oo  og  j po       r           e ane Side Opening    Guide Blower Assembly  through here                                                                                                                                                                             Center Support  Right Side Supporting Guide Shaft    Figure 7 27 Path for B
115. cutive PCBA board names  part numbers and correspond   ing firmware part numbers for each library series     TLS 5000 58xxx 501447 01 5   700115    TLS 6000 501137 01 2 700105  Executive III 501387 01 3 700105       Table 8 3 Executive PCBA Firmware usage by Model    8 2 1 Firmware Update via the SCSI or Fibre Channel Interface    A working SCSI or fibre channel interface to the TLS Medium changer is required  To  update via the SCSI interface a PC compatible computer running DOS  Windows 95   98  XP  NT  or 2000 is required  To update via the fibre channel interface a PC com   patible computer running Windows XP  NT or 2000 is required     NOTE    Using a DOS system requires the use of Adaptec   s ASPI interface for SCSI     501090 Rev  F    The TLS must be powered on and connected to the host computer prior to boot   ing the host computer   Note that when updating the firmware in a dual bay li   brary  with two executive PCBAs   only one of the PCBAs needs to be connected   While one PCBA is being updated  the firmware will be transferred to the other  PCBA      The Windows console program upload  exe is used to upload firmware to the  library  These files are contained in a self extracting zip file Up loadUtil exe     Execute the UploadUtil exe to extract the following ZIPed files     e Upload exe   Qualstar   s TLS Library firmware upload program   e Scanscsi exe   Utility to search the bus for SCSI devices     Execute the program scanscsi exe from a Windows command promp
116. d     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    7 18 1 Carousel PCBA Removal    TOP VIEW EVEN       Carousel PCBA       __          Carousel  A Gear Guard    Carousel PCBA                                                           Carousel Gear      Guard  62xx  82xx 54xx  je    Pe  gt    3 64xx  FRONT 84xx  TOP VIEW Carousel PCBA  2  FRONT  Carousel Motor  Power Cable  am    Connector  A CAROSL     N Carousel  Cable Connector      Position Sensor     Optical Switch Pair   meee Carousel BOBA  XXX Gear Guard  2     88xxx  2  a i _ Mounting Screws  3                 FRONT   PCBA Alignment Pin  PCBA Spacer  3   7 i    Figure 7 67 The Carousel PCBA  3 Views              501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 87    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Open the cabinet door     3  Remove as many tape magazines mounted on the carousel as needed to access  the Carousel PCBA     4  Greater access can be gained in 62xx and 82xx model libraries if the Top Panel   Section 7 4 1  and the left Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section  7 4 3  are removed     5  Remove as many Magazine Anchors from the carousel of 54xx 64xx 84xx and  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models as needed to access the Carousel PCBA  For each  Magazine Anchor that is removed  use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to re   move the two Receiver Mounting Screws and then remove the Magazine Anchor   To keep the receiver in alignment replace the two Receiver Mounting Screws into  the Receiver Mountin
117. d   Y PRIVATE  tddddd   Y SHUTTLE   ddddd   Y STORY 0   ddddd          Private  Display A D    Left   Prarsse Configuration  Right   Defaults  12V ddddd  Demonstrations  YES  3 3V ddddd   SCSI  5V ddddd  CARSPR  ddddd  CRTPRS  ddddd  I O CLEAR  ddddd  P Configuration SCSI I O FULL  ddddd  PostPlaceDly ddddd Internal 0  ddddd  PrePickRetries ddd Internal Mid ddddd  11 20  222222222  InternalFull ddddd  LCD Line 2 DEFAULT TPWR  dddda   10  277227777   YCLEAR  ddddd  11 20             YCLEARM  ddddd  LCD Line 3 DEFAULT  1 10         7 7         PCr serrseces Defaults  LCD Line 1 DEFAULT  1 10  2277727222             P Display A D   Left  P Display A D   Right   12V ddddd   3 3V ddddd   5V ddddd  CARSPR  ddddd  CRTPRS  ddddd  I O CLEAR  ddddd  I O FULL  ddddd  Internal 0  ddddd  Internal Mid ddddd  InternalFull ddddd  INTERNAL  ddddd  TPWR  ddddd  YCLEAR  ddddd  YCLEARM  ddddd    11 20  222222222     LCD Line 4 DEFAULT  1 10  2222222222     11 20  222222222              CLEAR                Continued in Figure 5 2  Figure 5 1 The Private Menu  Part 1     501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 1    NOTE    The menus in this chapter reflect revision 2 24 of the Executive PCBA EPROM software  If the    user has a different revision of the software  some items may not appear in the menus  Also  not  all menu items appear all the time  Some menu items are model dependent        Continued from Figure 5 1                                                                      P  Display Location
118. d Opera   tion Manual  Qualstar document number 501450      e Unpacking Instructions   e Control Panel   e Menu System   e System Configuration   e System Operation   e Preventative Maintenance  e Repacking Instructions    For information about the SCSI interface  or other information outside the scope of  this manual  please refer to the appropriate documents listed below     Qualstar  Subject Document Document  Number    ANSI X3 131 1994    msa    o a  SCSI SPI 2 Specification ANSI X3 302 1998 N A  SCSI Parallel Interface 2  SPI 2   SCSI 3 ANSI X3 253 199X N A  and Amendment AM1 to X3 253 1995       Table 1 1 Applicable Documents    501090 Rev  F Introduction 1 1    1 2    Although Qualstar has made every effort to insure the accuracy of the information  contained in this manual  no guarantee is expressed or implied that the manual is  error free  Qualstar reserves the right to make changes at any time without prior no   tification     The Qualstar Tape Libraries are sophisticated  state of the art computer peripherals   They should only be serviced by a competent service technician who is experienced  with the operation and maintenance of tape libraries  and only after reading and un   derstanding this manual and the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation  Manual     Important Safety Information    All of the operating instructions and maintenance procedures in Qualstar manuals  must be followed to prevent personal injury or damage to the equipment  In the inter   e
119. d by the digital  sensors    detectors     The carousel axis has a position sensor  which looks at a pattern encoded on the gear  guard  The other three axes of motion  I O port  vertical and insertion  have home po   sition sensors  These sensors are used for reference purposes during initialization and  operation     Digital Sensors    e Door Sensor  This sensor detects the condition of the cabinet door  open or closed   When a door open condition is detected  the system stops all moving as   semblies     e Carousel Position Sensors  The pattern output to these sensors by a carousel is used to determine the  position of the carousel s      e Vertical Axis Home Sensors  These sensors use the tall pin s  mounted in the bottom of the cabinet to  detect when each Carriage Assembly reaches its home position at the bot   tom of the cabinet     e Insertion Axis Home Sensors  These sensors detect when a Carriage   s Handler Assembly  on the Inser   tion Axis  is in its home position  fully retracted     e T O Port Full Sensor  This sensor detects when a tape cartridge is fully inserted into the I O port  slot  It consists of an infrared emitter on a small PCBA in the I O port as   sembly and a sensor on the I O port PCBA     Description and Theory of Operation 2 5    2 2 3    2 2 4    2 2 5    2 6    e T O Port Home Sensor  This sensor detects when the I O port slot is in its home position  fully re   tracted     e T O Port Clear Sensor  This sensor detects the presence of a tape c
120. d in a magazine or storage slot backwards or inverted   4  A tape is protruding excessively from a tape drive     5  An object is blocking a Y Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  optical path   Possibly a cartridge lying in the bottom of the library     6  A Y Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  detector or emitter is dirty or ob   scured     7  The unit is configured for no I O port  but one is installed and it is not positioned  all the way against the back stop     8  The unit requires calibration  due to a component or FRU change     6 2 11 During operation  the alert loport Jammed appears on the control panel  display     Possible causes     1  The Carriage is parked in front of the I O port  with a cartridge that is still in the  I O port slot engaging the grippers on the Handler     2  The I O port mechanism is jammed  due to a mechanical obstruction  or it is  binding against a stop     3  The I O port door is bent and the I O port slot or a cartridge in the slot is collid   ing with the door     4  The Shaft Coupling between the I O port motor and the lead screw is not  clamped properly     6 3 Calibration Failures    These are problems that occur when a calibration command was issued  but did not  execute successfully  Occasionally a spurious calibration failure can be corrected by  repeating the calibration procedure     IMPORTANT     Refer to section 6 1  Power Up and Initialization Failures  for problems not listed in  this section     6 14 Troubleshoot
121. d on a 62xx or 82xx library  replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      10  Close the cabinet door     7 19 Carousel Motor    7 19 1    7 90    62xx and 82xx models P N 500822 76 2  54xx  64xx and 84xx models P N 500822 68 9  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx models P N 500822 53 1    This section applies only to libraries with carousels  Single bay libraries will contain a sin   gle carousel and TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain two identical  carousels referred to as the left and right carousels when viewed from the front of the  TLS     The replacement procedure that follows will apply to replacing the Carousel Motor in   single bay models  The TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models replacement   procedure begins at Section 7 19 3 and will apply to replacing either Carousel Motor   making note of specific left or right side operations when required     Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    e Flat Blade Screwdriver   Dual Bay Models     e 3 32 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench   Single Bay Models     e 7 64 inch Allen  Hex  Wrench   Dual Bay Models     Material Required   e 3 inch x 3 32 inch Cable Ties    Single Bay Carousel Motor Removal   54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx Libraries     1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1    3  For 62xx and 82xx model libraries  remove the left Side Panel  Section 7 4 8      4  Open the cabinet door     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Follow the pr
122. d value must be  changed back to the original value        3 3 3 Location Designators    A Location Designator contains six characters used to describe any physical location   A    p    in the first character signifies a physical location and then the five remaining  characters are defined below  When a character is not required to define a par   ticular location  the character is replaced with a decimal point or dot     Ce  ror 16 a Sort    09   09      Table 3 1 The physical Location Field       501090 Rev  F The Menu System 3 7    Space This character is always a lower case    p    when describing the physical space   Characters a d indicate logical libraries a d element address space   Side The Side character will only appear in the 88xxx line of dual bay libraries  L for Left or R for    Right  Defines which side the location is on  This is needed for all tape drives and magazine  locations  A decimal point appears when this character is not needed     Face This character is only needed to describe which face the desired magazine is located on  A  decimal point appears when this character is not needed   Type  When describing a magazine location  the story  A  or B  is defined here  Note that stories are    Stor always uppercase  Besides magazine location  there are five other types of locations defined by  y this character  H for Handler  I for I O Port  P for Private  S for Shuttle and T for Tape Drive     These two digits are used to describe which tape drive or which
123. dddddd   Needs Cleaning  NO Cart Present  NO   Write Protect  NO COM Problem  NO   CleanUses XXXXXXXxx Configured  NO   PwrOnHour  XXXXXXXX Door Open  NO   CleanHour XXXXXXXX Door Openable  NO   TapeRmain XXXXXXXX Drive Error  NO   Temp Inside  ddd Fan Problem  NO   Temp Outside  ddd Hardware Error  NO   12V  ddd ID Correct  NO   5V  ddd In Flux  NO   Lost Replies  ddddd Needs Cleaning  NO   No ID  NO   Ready  NO   State  IDLE   Private      Executive Temp Problem  NO    Left Unloaded  NO   Firmware  P2277  Volt Problem  NO  I2C Address  xx  PCB Number  501  7  PCB Revision  2  P Executive      Left  Firmware  PIPPI   I2C Address  xx  PCB Number  501  7  PCB Revision                Figure 5 2 The Private Menu  Part 2     5 1 Introduction    The  Private menu is the root menu for the protected service menus  It is also a  privileged  password protected menu  This means that a password must be set to gain  access to the items in the  Private menu  The password to the  Private menu is  cleared before the TLS is shipped from the factory  because the menu is intended for  use by field service personnel only     5 2 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    Passwords are used together with security locks to protect the TLS    configuration  against unauthorized or unintentional changes  and unauthorized manual operations   Therefore  the Master security lock must be disabled before a password can be set in  the  Private menu     5 2 Defeating Security Locks    There are four types of secur
124. de Reader  Section 7 7  and or a High Voltage Differential  SCSI Interface  Section 7 20  to any TLS model  Installing or removing an expansion  kit changes the configuration of a unit  Therefore  after an expansion kit is installed   the unit must be reconfigured and  in some cases  recalibrated     TLS Expansions    9 1    9 2 Model Expansions    Each kit should take less than 30 minutes to install     Model se132 1058264   sooear 052   13210264 Ganvages  92 1 3  oo      Model 66120 68280   _s0080  045   12010240 Canvases  02 19  o9     Model aeaa 10 86204   s0nea  052   19210 264 Carriages  92 19  99      Figure 9 1 Available Model Expansion Kits       Installing an expansion kit is a five step procedure   1  Install the new hardware     2  Enter Update for the password in the Private menu   Reconfiguring the TLS  model number and recalibrating the TLS are password protected procedures      3  Reconfigure the Library s model number to reflect the hardware changes   4  Recalibrate the Library   5  Clear the password  Update  to prevent unauthorized access to the Private    menu     9 2 1 Installing a Model Expansion Kit    This procedure requires one expansion kit  described in Figure 9 1   plus a number 2  Phillips screwdriver to install the hardware     9 2 1 1 Model 6210 to 6220 or Model 8211 to 8222 Expansion    This procedure replaces the Midplate  and adds a Carousel and two Receivers     9 2 1 1 1 Removal of Receiver Assembly    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove t
125. driver tighten the fasteners to secure the cover     Blower Assembly Removal                                                             Blower Guard Screen    AI                            Screws  6                                                                                      Blower Guard Screen    Figure 7 25 Blower Guard Screen in Dual Bay Model    7 36    Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    Open the cabinet door    Remove all six Phillips screws from the Blower Guard Screen  See Figure 7 25   Remove the Blower Guard Screen through the front opening of the TLS     Disconnect the Power cable from the POWER connector on the Blower PCBA   See Figure 7 26     Disconnect the Blower ribbon cable from the D BAY 0 connector on the lower  Drive Bay PCBA  See Figure 7 26     Using a long bladed Phillips screwdriver  remove all five of the Blower mounting  screws  Make sure to support the Blower Assembly with your free hand to pre   vent it from falling  See Figure 7 26     Carefully guide the Blower Assembly between the right side Supporting Guide  Shaft and the center  See Figure 7 27  After the Blower Assembly has cleared the  shaft and the center support remove it through the front opening     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Upper Drive Bay PCBA           Lower Drive Bay PCBA     7            Power  ye Cable  N    POWER  Connector                                                                               lt   D BAYO           Y    Conne
126. e 7 77      b  If a HVD Adapter PCBA is installed on the replacement Executive  PCBA  connect the SCSI cable to the SCSIID connector on the HVD  Adapter PCBA  Figure 7 77   See Section 7 20 for details about connect   ing the SCSI Differential Adapter PCBA     Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 65    e 12VFANS  The connector is not polarity sensitive or keyed  After the connector is  attached to the PCBA  insert a Cable Tie through the hole in the Ex   ecutive PCBA  Figure 7 42   then secure the Fan Assembly   s power ca   ble to the Executive PCBA     e RS485A  RS485 or RS4851  These connectors are keyed     CAUTION    To avoid equipment damage  be sure that all pins on the 12VFANS cable   s plug    mate correctly with all pins on the 12VFANS connector on the Executive PCBA        e CARAGE  Carriage     e OPTO  This connector is keyed     e DRVBAY  Drive Bay     13  Reinstall the Rear Service Panel  then use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to    reinstall all six Rear Service Panel mounting screws  Figure 7 44      14  Open the cabinet door     7 16 3 Reconfiguring the TLS    7 66    CAUTION    To prevent possible injury or equipment damage  BEFORE APPLYING POWER af   ter the Executive PCBA is replaced  MAKE SURE THE CABINET DOOR IS OPEN     When power is applied to the TLS while the cabinet door is open  no TLS motors  will operate  The configuration information in the new Executive PCBA must be  updated to match the library   s installed hardware  BEFORE any TLS motors are a
127. e 9 7      5  Reinstall the Side Panels  Section 7 4 4   then reinstall the Top Panel  Section  7 4 2      6  Proceed to Section 9 2 2 of this chapter        Handler  Power Supply                       Upper Carousel p o DSN Screws  3     Pivot Support So a    Figure 9 7 TLS Top View    9 2 1 2 Model 5433 to 5466  6430 to 6460 or 8433 to 8466 Expansion    501090 Rev  F    This procedure adds one Receiver Assembly to each of the three empty carousel faces   Refer to Figure 9 8    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    2  Open the cabinet door     3  Reach in through the cabinet door and rotate the Carousel by hand until an  empty Carousel face  one without Receivers  faces you     4  Position a Receiver over the empty Carousel face and align the mounting screw  holes     5  Insert two 6 32 x 3 8 inch screws  with integral lock washers  into the top set of  Receiver Mounting Screw holes  then securely tighten with a number 2 Phillips  screwdriver     6  Position a Magazine Anchor  Blue color  at the bottom of the receiver and align  the mounting screw holes     7  Insert two 6 32 x 1 2 inch screws through the Magazine Anchor and into the bot   tom set of Receiver Mounting Screw holes  then securely tighten with a number  2 Phillips screwdriver     TLS Expansions 9 7    8  Rotate the Carousel by hand to access the next empty Carousel face     9  Repeat steps 4 through 7 to install two more Receivers     Top view of Carousel with  3 Receivers mounted             n
128. e CLEAR ACCESS command     Press the MENU key twice to exit the menu system     The password is now cleared  Notice that Private is no longer visible in the    Top Menu     The Private Menu 5 7    5 4 The Private Menu    5 4 1 Private CALIBRATE Command       The CALIBRATE command should not be executed without a specific reason for doing       so  because it involves risk  For example  if the CALIBRATE command is used incor   rectly  improper Handler operation may result  Therefore  if the Handler is properly  picking and placing cartridges  and the user does not have a specific reason for using  the CALIBRATE command  recalibrating the TLS is not recommended     Sometimes it is necessary to execute the CALIBRATE command  For example  the TLS  must be recalibrated after new hardware is installed or if the model number is changed     The CALIBRATE command causes the TLS to        e Determine the Vertical  Y Axis  positions of the magazines   e Calculate the drive positions     e Verify that a Carriage can sense its Vertical  Y Axis  home position  bot   tom of vertical travel   using the Vertical Axis Home Sensor     e Verify that a Handler can sense its Insertion  Z Axis  home position  Grip   per fully retracted   using the Insertion Axis Home Sensor     e Verify that a Carousel can sense its home position using the Carousel Po   sition Sensors     e Verify that the I O port can sense its I O port axis home position  I O port  slot fully retracted   using the I O port home s
129. e Power Supply  7 15 1   This will al   low easier access to the Carousel Motor mounting screws     5  If present  remove the tape drive assembly from the top location in the drive bay  on the side where the Carousel Motor is being removed     6  Open the cabinet door     7  Remove the tape magazines mounted on the carousel on which the motor is be   ing removed     8  Remove both of the Magazine Anchors from 3 consecutive receivers on the carou   sel  For each Magazine Anchor being removed  use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to remove the two Receiver Mounting Screws and then remove the Maga   zine Anchor  To keep the receiver in alignment replace the two Receiver Mount   ing Screws into the Receiver Mounting Screw holes and tighten with a number 2  Phillips screwdriver before removing the next Magazine Anchor  See Figure  7 72     9  Remove all six Phillips screws from the Blower Guard Screen  See Figure 7 25     10  Reach in through the cabinet door and disconnect the Carousel Motor Power Ca   ble from the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 67 and Figure 7 73      7 94 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    11  Push the Carousel Motor Cable down through the hole in the Midplate     12  Ifremoving the right side Carousel Motor  follow the procedure in Section 7 10 1  to remove the I O port assembly     13  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all three mounting screws from  the Upper Carousel Pivot Support  Figure 7 74   then lift the Upper Carousel  Pivot Supp
130. e makes a quieter buzzing sound than the others     When the power is turned on  the message Needs Calibration appears  on the control panel display     Possible cause     The unit needs to be calibrated  due to an Executive PCBA replacement  Configura   tion change  or a failed calibration attempt     When the power is turned on  the alert Carousel Jammed appears on the  control panel display  and a Carousel motor does not rotate or make any    noise     When the power is turned on in a library  one of the things that happen is that carou   sels attempt to home themselves  This means that carousels attempt to find the small  slots in their gear guard using the opto sensors on the carousel PCBA  and align  themselves with one of these slots  They count the number of stepper motor steps be   tween the slots  to verify proper operation  Any problem in this process results in this  alert  If the library makes no noise during this process  this indicates that a Carousel  motor is not being driven     Possible causes     1  The cable from an Executive PCBA to the Carousel PCBA is damaged or discon   nected     2  A Carousel motor cable is damaged or disconnected   3  The unit is configured to be a carousel model and no carousel is installed   4  An Executive PCBA has failed     5  A Carousel motor has failed     When the power is turned on  the alert Carousel Jammed appears on the    control panel display  Also  a Carousel motor makes a loud noise and    does not turn  or the caro
131. e menu     9 3 2 6   Barcode Label Check Characters    Follow the instructions in Chapter 7 of the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Op   eration manual  501450  to properly configure the Labe1lCheckChar value     9 3 2 7 Testing the Barcode Reader    1     2     501090 Rev  F    Turn the TLS power off  then open the cabinet door     Insert a labeled tape in location A01  1A01 for carousel units    Refer to the end of Chapter 3 in the Installation and Operation Manual  Qual   star document number 501450  for tape cartridge location diagrams     Close the cabinet door  then turn the TLS power on    If the Barcode Reader is not correctly connected to the Carriage Assembly  the  error message    Barcode Reader Failure    appears on the front panel display  If  this occurs  turn the TLS power off  open the cabinet door  check the connections  at both ends of the Barcode Reader cable  then repeat this step     Wait for the Handler to stop moving   Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu   Use the VW  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Operation     Press the ENTER key to enter the Operation menu        Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Element Status     Press the ENTER key to enter the Operation Element Status menu    The pointer should be pointing at Display      TLS Expansions 9 15    10  Press the ENTER key to enter the  Operation Element Status Display menu        11  Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Location   12  Press the ENTER key to start editing 
132. e power supply     See Figure 7 33  The label will read 500826 xx x  Make sure that the replacement power supply  has the same part number  or its equivalent  as the one that is to be removed        Handler Power Supply Label    Figure 7 33    501090 Rev  F    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1     3  Remove the right Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section 7 4 3    4  Remove all four protective Screen mounting screws  Figure 7 38      5  Disconnect the Power Cable and the 2 Wire Cable connectors from the Power  Supply PCBA  Figure 7 33      6  Remove all four Power Supply mounting screws  Figure 7 38      7  Lift the Power Supply out of the TLS     Protective Screen  Mounting Screws  4        Power Supply  Mounting Screws  4                  Protective Screen                         D a  W W       2 Wire Cable Power Cable  Connector Connector    The Handler Power Supply   6110 and 8111 Models    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 47    7 13 2 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement   6110 and 8111 Models    1     Insert the Power Supply into place in the side of the TLS with its connectors to   wards the bottom of the TLS     Install all four Power Supply mounting screws  Figure 7 38      Reconnect the Power Cable and 2 Wire Cable connectors to the Power Supply  PCBA  Figure 7 33      Place the protective Screen on top of the Power Supply and install all four Screen  mounting screws  Figure 7 33   
133. e shielded cables  when connecting this device to others     European Union Directive 89 336 EEC and Standard EN55022   Electromagnetic Compatibility     Warning    This is a Class A product  In a domestic environment this product may cause radio  interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures        European Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment  WEEE     Qualstar encourages its customers to use current recycling practices in order to re   duce the burden that waste electronic products place on the environment     If you are retiring a fully functional tape library  you are encouraged to transfer the  functional unit to a new user  thereby extending the useful life of the tape library  The  manufacture of all products requires the consumption of energy  By extending the life  of the tape library  energy is conserved     In accordance with environmental directives that are being implemented in many  countries  refer to the European Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip   ment   WEEE  Qualstar provides customers with    End of Life Instructions    that iden     501090 Rev  F    501090 Rev  F    tify the process for recycling the materials and components that make up a Qualstar  tape library     End of Life Instructions    Tools required    e P1 and P2 Phillips head screwdrivers  e T20 Torx head screwdriver  e Hex head  Allen  wrench driver set    e    1 4 inch hex nut driver    Disassembly procedure   1  Remove door 
134. e the lead based solder  exemption until such time as industry data verifies that lead free solders are capable  of meeting or exceeding the documented reliability and quality standards achieved  with lead based solders     Until such time as Qualstar replaces lead based solder with lead free solder  effected  subassemblies must be disposed of appropriately     Technical Support Information    The best source for service related information is your system reseller  Alternately   the Qualstar Technical Support Department can be reached Monday through Friday   between the hours of 7 30 A M  and 4 30 P M  Pacific Time  at     Qualstar Corporation    3990 B Heritage Oak Court  Simi Valley  CA 93063    Attn  Technical Support  Fax   805  583 7749  Phone   877  444 1744  Monday     Friday 7 30 a m  to 4 30 p m  PST  After hours support   805  526 7480 or  805  583 7748  E Mail support qualstar com    E Mail  sales qualstar com  Web  www qualstar com    501090 Rev  F    Table of Contents    1  IN EL ORDUCUION oivsiseedisecacesssacenesdoasstesscoestectevecesddesessensevostesseasescaacessuvedscacesesessusessuacessecesseses 1 1  1 1 Who Should Read This Manual oo    ccc ecccccccsccsseceeseceeaceceeaeeeeaecseaeeceeeeeaeceeaeeeeeeeees 1 1  1 2 Important Safety Information            ccecccscccccceceesesssececececcsesessnseceeececsesenssseeseeeeesenes 1 2  Ted      thum Battery eaa hes ec sci es SP ee ha ea cea ah  1 3   2  Description and Theory of Operation              cccssssssescccec
135. el menu are function dependent items  For example  ABORT    and SLEW only appear while the Carousel is busy        General Carousel Information    Carousels are moved by a four phase  DC stepper motor  There are 200 steps per mo   tor shaft revolution  There are 3200 steps per carousel rotation  A pinion gear on the  motor shaft drives the carousel gear  which is housed inside the gear guard     The gear guard contains indexing slots  which are placed in a specific pattern  Since car   ousels have six faces  the gear guard has indexing slots for each face  including a single   extra wide indexing slot  These slots are sensed by the Carousel Position sensor     The Carousel Position sensor is an optical switch pair  mounted on the carousel PCBA   P N 500617 02 2   As the gear guard rotates  it passes between the sensor s emitter  and detector  interrupting the sensor   s beam  As each indexing slot in the gear guard  passes through the sensor  it allows the sensor   s beam to reach the detector  The pat   tern of indexing slots that the detector sees is used to determine the Carousel s posi   tion  The extra wide indexing slot is used to establish an absolute position reference     Table 5 1 shows the relationship between the carousel face Stop numbers and the cor   responding carousel faces  It also shows the number of motor shaft rotation steps re   quired to move counterclockwise from Stop 0  the face 1 stop  to each Stop number   Counterclockwise rotation  as viewed from a
136. en seconds   If the ejected cartridge is not detected after the  specified number of retries  and seconds   the TLS will issue an Alert message     The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    5 4 10 The Private Display A D Status Screen    Private   Display A D     Left   12V   3 3V   5V  CARSPR   CRIPRS        I O CLEAR   I O FULL   Internal 0   Internal Mid   InternalFull   TPWR    YCLEAR   YCLEARM                    ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd  ddddd       In a dual bay library the Display A D status screen initially displays the current ana     log to digital converter output values from the right side Executive board  Select the  Left sub menu to see the output values from the left Executive circuit board  Single    bay libraries will simply display the analog to digital converter output values informa     tion  All outputs are displayed in millivolts  0 to 5000 mV   The analog inputs are de     scribed below in Table 5 3     Lower readings indicate a cartridge is present      O0 CLEAR I O Port M Clear Opto Sensor    VO FULL I O Port M Full Opto Sensor  Internal O A D Converter Internal Check Channel  Should indicate a value of 0  Internal Mid A D Converter Internal Check Channel  Should indicate a value of 2502  InternalFull A D Converter Internal Check Channel  Should indicate a value of 5000  TPWR Term Power voltage    YCLEAR Y Clear  Inventory Sentry Beam  Opto Sensor  YCLEARM Not used on this model library       Table 5 3
137. ename may contain a sub revision letter as  shown in this example     Upload 0 0 1    700105c 209    The program will display the upload transfers        700105 Executive Firmware  Revision 2 09c      Packets    7  Do not turn off TLS power while the update is in progress  The last packet is       number 512     8  The TLS will begin the firmware update process  Wait for the following message  to appear on the library   s display     Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    FIRMWARE UPGRADE  System Firmware   is being changed   DO NOT POWER OFF    9  Itis very important not to power off the TLS while reprogramming is in pro   gress  Doing so can cause the library to lose all of its program contents     10  Following the upgrade  the TLS will perform an internal initialization function  followed by a scanning of the TLS inventory     11  The FIRMWARE UPGRADE message will be cleared when the process has com   pleted     12  GototheMaintenance Display Revision menu  The displayed Part  Number and Revision must correlate with the firmware just uploaded     8 3 Firmware Update via Q Link    Q Link allows for the uploading of library firmware using your web browser  Please  see the Click on the Library menu item under the Upload Firmware folder in the  menu tree to access the Private Firmware Upload Library screen and follow the in   structions below        A Q Link   Microsoft Internet Explorer        File Edit View Favorites Tools Help    S22  ob a a a S Slp 32 2 8 3  Stop Refresh     
138. ensor     e Verify the full scale outputs from the I O port full and I O port clear optical  sensors  while the sensors are in an unobstructed  full scale state  Deter   mines threshold values for their use based upon the full scale readings     e Calibrate the Inventory Sentry Beam  Y Clear  detector by measuring the  sensor s full scale output  sensor unobstructed  and the minimum output   sensor obstructed   Calculates the new threshold value between the full   scale and minimum output readings     e Calibrate the Cartridge Presence Sensor s optical detector by measuring  the full scale output  sensor unobstructed  and the minimum output  sen   sor obstructed   Calculates the new threshold value between the full scale  and minimum output readings     All of these calibration steps are checked against acceptance range parameters  Each  position or optical output reading must fall within its acceptable range before subse   quent positions and thresholds are determined     CAUTION    If the TLS is not properly set up prior to invoking the CALIBRATE command  the    calibration process can result in invalid calibration data  which may prevent Han   dler operation        5 8 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    Using the CALIBRATE Command    1     2     Press the MENU key to open the Top Menu     Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer in the left column to Private  then  press the ENTER key to open the Private menu        Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to CALIBRAT     C
139. er must not be present at the SCL connector  The IC component must be  installed at location U1  For the Lower Bay Board  P N 501257 02 6  jumpers  must not be present at the SDA and SCL connectors and the IC component must  be removed at location U1  See Figure 7 63     2  Replace any spacers that came loose from the mounting studs of the Bracket     3  Align the Drive Bay PCBA mounting screw holes with the mounting studs of the  Bracket     4  Install a washer onto a mounting stud  then with a 1 4 inch nutdriver thread a  PCBA mounting nut onto the mounting stud  Install the remaining PCBA  Mounting screws the same way  Figure 7 62      5  Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through the front of the TLS  Maneu   ver the tape drive connectors on the PCBA so they are facing out the drive bay  openings  Figure 7 64   Align the Brackets three holes with the corresponding  threaded holes in the TLS     NOTE    In the next step  only finger tighten the screws  The Bracket needs to be loosely held to the    frame of the TLS        6  Insert a Drive Bay Bracket screw through a hole in the bracket  Thread the  screw into the TLS finger tight  Install the remaining two Bracket screws the  same way     7  Install two tape drive assemblies into the TLS in the drive bays that correspond  to the PCBA that is being installed  Carefully align the Tape Drive Connector   s  on the Drive Bay PCBA with the mating connector   s on the tape drive assemblies   Figure 7 64   It may be necessa
140. er to  Model     6  Make sure that the cabinet door is open  then press the ENTER key to begin ed   iting the model number     7  Press the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key repeatedly to change the model number to  match the new hardware configuration  e g  from TLS   6210 to TLS   6220      8  Close the cabinet door   The Carriage remains stationary      9  Press the MENU key  then press the EXIT key to exit the menu system   The  display indicates that the unit must be recalibrated      Press the MENU key to return to the Top Menu     501090 Rev  F TLS Expansions 9 11    9 2 4 Recalibrating the Unit       GI    Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 2 to execute the Private menu s CALIBRATI  command  to update the TLS configuration to match the newly installed hardware     9 2 5 Clearing the Password       Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 3 to execute the Private menu s CLEAR AC   CESS command  to remove the password  Update  and prevent unauthorized access       to the Private menu     9 3 Barcode Reader    Barcode readers are standard on all dual bay libraries and on single bay models 5433   5466  6430  6460  8433 and 8466  Barcode readers may be added to all other models   Adding a barcode reader should take less than 30 minutes     Installing a barcode reader is a six step procedure   1  Install the Barcode Reader hardware   2  Enter Update for the password in the Private menu     3  Edit the BCR value in the Configuration Advanced Changer   Mechanics menu     4  Clear the 
141. eseeeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeess 7 3  7 4 Top and Side Panels    ccccessssssccceceesessnsececceecseseesssseceeececsesessseseeeeeesenesssaseeseesenes 7 4  AA Top Panel Removal  issic sesicccsscceescssdcsgeven tee2se dees dic oad eden 0a has es oS EEEE EERE 7 5  7 4 2 Top Panel Replacement          ccccccccccccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeess 7 5  7 4 3 Side Panel Removal  Left or Right               cccccccccccccccessesssseceeeeeceesessssssceeeeeeseeensnaees 7 6  7 4 4 Side Panel Replacement  Left or Right             ccccccceesssseceeccecsesessseeeeeeeecsesensnaees 7 7  Tso    Carriage  Assemblies x sce vessccical casdte an iss cece oy iuudenta ded e a aaea ias 7 8  7 5 1 Carriage Assembly Removal            ccccccccccccssssssseeececeeceesesssseceeececsesessseeeseesecseneeas 7 10  7 5 2 Carriage Assembly Replacement  0            ccccccsssccccceeeeesenssseceeeceeeesessaeeeeeeseseseeneas 7 15  7 5 3 Lubricating the Vertical  Y  Axis Leadscrew            cccccessscsccceceseessesssceeeseceesensaees 7 19  Te    Cavetage POBA ie seni cece e ra eae Soe iho MOE ASE CEA aS oa ETA Rave 7 20  7 6 1 Carriage PCBA Removal o            cccccccscccccceeeessnsessececcceceeseseseceeeeeeeeeeseesssaeeeseeeeeensas 7 20  7 6 2 Carriage PCBA Replacement              cccccccccccssssssececeececeesessseceeeeeesesensaseeeeeeeeseseeas 7 21  tak         Barcode Reader oaar eee ERE E ET E OT A O T 7 22  7 7 1 Barcode Reader Removal        cecsccccesssn
142. esseeeeeees 7 71  7 17 3 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 62xx and 82xx Models        ccsccccesssecceceesseceeessseeeenees 7 72  7 17 4 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 62xx and 82xx Models           ccccsccccessseceeeeesseeeeees 7 74  7 17 5 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models          eccccccesssseeceesseeeeees 7 76  7 17 6 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models         cccsccccssseeeeees 7 78  7 17 7 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement for58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Models               006 7 80  7 18 Carousel  POBA sihitee tiain e e tteasestsateeoed aer aeea 7 87  7 18 1 Carousel PCBA Removal         ssssssssesssessserssessseesssesssesssessseesseesseesseesseeesseesseesseesseese 7 87  7 18 2 Carousel PCBA Replacement             cccccccccccssssssecececceceesenssseceeceeesesenssseeeeceeeeseseees 7 89  7 19 Carousel Motore acessscccikeoeiitiegcetecsetae steak toaeescs Soecastd svatecselagcutes cosiaccsaeahaehevasesevavees 7 90  7 19 1 Single Bay Carousel Motor Removal  54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx  VTDLATICS  AEE verti EE E A A E E E A EE OA OAE 7 90  7 19 2 Single Bay Carousel Motor Replacement  54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx  D oa e D a LE EA S EEE E T A ATTAT N 7 93  7 19 3 Dual Bay Carousel Motor Removal  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Libraries             7 94  7 19 4 Dual Bay Carousel Motor Replacement  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Libraries      7 98  7 20 SCSI High Voltage Differential Adapter PCBA 0 0 0 0    ccceccccccccccecceeeesssseceeeeeeeees 7 99  7 20 1 SCSI High Voltage
143. essessssceccccecesssssessceceececesseees 2 1  Xle Model Identification nesr na acsccasnceodustites a a a e ae tease 2 1  22     General Descriptio aesa aA debe hs ged cae A E A R Sa E a A 2 3   2 amp 1 Motion System Suara anaa N a e E sto e a aE AM RS 2 3  VAPAA E110  a TAAA E ATA A N 2 4  22 3  AH ANGE SOlETO1ds 2454 635626 su  a a e e a e a a aS 2 6  2AA Barcode  Reader sonsusngranria t an E E A EEA E 2 6  ara Barcode  Labels aivisid  ar EE ER Ea AAE AEA 2 6  22 0 Barcode Label Usapan ar eean aa annia E A a E N e AA 2 7  2 3 Component Identification        sessessssssessreesssssseseesesssssseccsscessssssesectesssssstoseeessssssroeesessesose 2 7  Aand  Handler oaa E E A A ENEE 2 14  2 3 2 VO Port ASsembly soehoenan iiaae eea areren ea iata EEE E E Aane e TESE hEr En 2 14  2 83 3 Field Replaceable Units  FRUS              nsnsnsnessssssrsrersrersrrsseresererererereresrerrrrerereeseses 2 15   3  The Menu System sssisiserdinisseienseraossaia tas darasa s ELAO NE AS cowsseei saa sdvesgousdleaevaseueseccesouaees 3 1   3 1 Using the Menu Control Keys           sssssssesssessssssseseressrssssesereerersssssserereesssseseoeesesessesrenee 3 1  3 1 1 The MENU Control Keynesiin aE a E E aE A ea eaei 3 1  3 1 2 The A  UP  and V  DOWN  Control Keys         sssssesesesessssssssseesssessesrreesersesssserreses 3 1  3 1 38 The ENTER Control Key          cccccccccccccccccccessssssceesececescsessnscascececsesessaseassesecsesennaeas 3 2  31 4 The  EXIT Control Key oca anerer oe svescaends vos ta
144. eters to sat   isfy your display requirements     TLS Remote Front Panel Properties       Figure 8 10 Settings Screen Under the Properties Menu    ASCII Setup    M  E       Figure 8 11 ASCII Setup Screen under Settings Screen    8 10 Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    8 4 5 Remote Library Command Mode       To access the Remote Library Command Mode  press the ESC key and type    cmd    fol   lowed by the  lt Enter gt  key  This will display the Command Help screen depicted in  Figure 8 12 followed by a DOS like command prompt     gt      Commands may now be en   tered in lower case text  All commands must end with the  lt Enter gt  key  Most termi   nal emulators support the backspace key for correcting typing errors  Quotation  marks are shown for clarity and are not to be typed in the actual command line     E Com2_96   HyperT erminal  iof x   File Edit View Call Transfer Help    Dle B13  2a        Qualstar Remote Library Commands    Command Help   Drive select  AIT only   Exit to Front Pane   Loc   Log   Reset TLS   Unlock log   modem firmware down load             i a   Connected 1 06 47 VT100  9600 8 N 1 SCROLL  CAPS  NUM    Capture Lb    Figure 8 12 Remote Library Commands    8 4 6   Xmodem Firmware Download  lt xdl gt     The    xd1    command instructs the library to receive new TLS firmware via an object  file on the remote terminal computer using the XMODEM communications protocol  If  the transmission is terminated at the terminal emulator  the TLS will ignore the 
145. free or that it is accurate with regard to  any specification  Qualstar reserves the right to modify product designs and specifica   tions without notice     Qualstar and the Qualstar logo are registered trademarks of Qualstar Corporation   Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners     Notices    Qualstar products are covered by one or more of the following patents   6 163 139 and 6 560 061  Other patents pending     Qualstar equipment is manufactured from new parts  or new and used parts  In some  cases  Qualstar equipment may not be new and may have been previously installed   Regardless  Qualstar   s warranty terms apply unless the equipment is specifically  identified by Qualstar as    used    or    refurbished        This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A  digital device  pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules  These limits are designed to pro   vide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is oper   ated in a commercial environment  This equipment generates  uses  and can radiate  radio frequency energy and  if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc   tion manual  may cause harmful interference to radio communications  Operation of  this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which  case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense  Shielded  cables are required for this device to comply with FCC Rules  Us
146. g Screw holes and tighten with a number 2 Phillips screw   driver  See Figure 7 68     6  Reach in through the cabinet door and disconnect the CAROSL Cable and the  Carousel Motor Power Cable from the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 67              Top view of Carousel with          Magazine Anchor a     Light Blue Color                        6 32 x 1 2 Receiver       ie  Mounting Screws  2   Oo  Magazine Anchor   Light Blue Color  o  Front view of Receiver Side view of Receiver    Figure 7 68 Magazine Anchors Shown on 54 64 84xx or 58 68 88xxx Models    7 88 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    NOTE    If necessary  rotate the carousel slightly by hand to reach each PCBA mounting screw     Figure 7 67         7  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all three PCBA mounting screws  and PCBA spacers  Figure 7 67      CAUTION    In the next step  be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor on the  Carousel Gear Guard Figure 7 67   as you remove the Carousel PCBA        8  Lift the Carousel PCBA slightly to clear the PCBA Alignment Pin  then gently  slide the PCBA along the Carousel Gear Guard toward the front of the cabinet   When the Carousel Position Sensor is in front of the Carousel Gear Guard  slide  the Carousel PCBA towards the cabinet door to remove it   Figure 7 67      7 18 2 Carousel PCBA Replacement    501090 Rev  F    CAUTION    In the next steps  be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor on the  Carousel Gear Guard  Figure 7 67 
147. g the  inside of the library is placed in the same direction as they were when they were  removed  Reversing the direction of an old air filter may cause dirt to be trans   ferred into the library     Replace the large Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the four quarter turn  fasteners clockwise     Use a flat blade screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners and  carefully remove the right side access cover on the rear of the TLS  as viewed  from the rear   See Figure 7 24     Use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the single quarter turn fastener at the top of  the small Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise     Remove the small Air Filter Clamp from the TLS   Remove the air filter     Replace the old air filter with a new one or reinstall the old one if it is not yet  dirty enough to be replaced  Never try to clean and reuse an old air filter  If an  old air filter is being reinstalled  make sure that the side that was facing the in   side of the library is placed in the same direction as it was when it was removed   Reversing the direction of an old air filter may cause dirt to be transferred into  the library     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 35    7 9 2    12     13     Replace the small Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the single quarter   turn fastener clockwise     When filter replacement is complete  align the access covers four fasteners with  the corresponding receptacles on the rear panel of the TLS  then using a flat  blade screw
148. gh the right side Access Panel opening and disconnect  the ribbon cable from the SHUTTLE connector  Figure 7 80  on the PCBA  which  is attached to the Shuttle Assembly     accessible through  this opening                                             io                          r of TLS with Access Panel Removed    Open the cabinet door     Remove any tape cartridge magazines from either carousel that are protruding  over the front edge of the Midplate  This will allow sufficient clearance when re   moving the Shuttle Assembly     From the front of the TLS  use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the  four Shuttle Assembly mounting screws  which are accessible underneath the  Midplate  Figure 7 80      While supporting the Shuttle Assembly with one hand  remove the remaining  two mounting screws  which are accessible from the top of the Midplate  Figure  7 80      Using both hands pull the Shuttle Assembly towards the front of the TLS while  tilting it upwards to clear the Midplate  the guide shafts and the support mem   ber in the center of the front opening  Figure 7 82      When the Shuttle Assembly has cleared the Midplate  the support member and  the guide shafts rotate it 90 degrees to vertical and remove it through the front  of the TLS  Figure 7 82      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 105    Shuttle Connector is    Shuttle Assembly    Midplate   a                    Support Member                      Front  of TLS                                              
149. gnetic nutdriver works best for this job  to remove  all four PCBA mounting nuts from the PCBA mounting studs  Be careful not to  drop the nuts into the bottom of the TLS     8  Lift the Executive PCBA off of the PCBA mounting studs and out of the TLS     9  Reinstall all four PCBA mounting nuts onto the PCBA mounting studs  to keep  the PCBA spacers in place         gt  one gJ q    Rear Service Panel  amp                   Mounting       Screws  6   p      gt  Q p  Right Side           _    i         Left Side  Executive PCBA is    o     Executive PCBA is  behind this Service Panel y A    behind this Service Panel                                                                                  Single Bay Library Dual Bay Library    Figure 7 44 View of Rear Service Panels    7 16 2 Executive PCBA Replacement    Refer to Figure 7 42 or Figure 7 43     7 16 2 1 Introduction    Executive PCBA FRUs are not configured for any particular TLS model  or any spe   cific TLS unit  at the factory  Also  since all of a unit   s configuration  calibration and  inventory information is stored in its Executive PCBA   s non volatile Clock RAM chip   which is permanently attached to the Executive PCBA   all this information is lost  when the Executive PCBA is replaced  Therefore  the configuration information in the  Executive PCBA FRU will not match the configuration of the TLS when it is first in   stalled     After replacing an Executive PCBA  before doing anything else  the user must up  
150. he    Leadscrew and Spring Cup Assembly will be removed as a subassembly  Figure 7 4 or Figure 7 5         12  Remove the Leadscrew Spring Cup subassembly through the top plate by gently  raising the Carriage Assembly all the way to the top of the Vertical  Y  Axis  range of motion     NOTE  In the next step  a thin metal spacer may come loose from the bottom of the Leadscrew     13  While holding the Carriage Assembly at the top of its vertical range of motion   rotate the Leadscrew counter clockwise to disengage it from the Vertical  Y  Axis  Leadscrew Motor Nut  Figure 7 9   This may require holding the  Y  Axis nut to  prevent it from rotating  Finally lift the Leadscrew out of the top plate and set it  in a safe place  Locate the thin metal spacer and place it in a safe location     7 12 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    14  Carefully lower the Carriage Assembly back down onto the bottom plate     15  There are two Guide Shaft Strike Plates mounted on the top plate on single bay  libraries and there are three for each Carriage Assembly on dual bay models   Gently move the Switch Bracket ribbon cable out of the way on all single bay  models and when removing the right carriage assembly on dual bay models  Re   move all the appropriate Guide Shaft Strike Plate mounting screws  then remove  the Guide Shaft Strike Plates  See Figure 7 10 or Figure 7 11     16  Slowly lift the rear Guide Shaft up and out of the TLS  For dual bay models only   slowly lift the s
151. he CPOPTO cable to the circuit  board     7  Unplug the cable from the CPOPTO connector   8  Unplug the two gripper solenoid wires from the GRIPA and GRIPB terminals     9  Use a number 1 Phillips Screwdriver to remove all four PCBA mounting screws     7 6 2 Carriage PCBA Replacement    Refer to Figure 7 14     This procedure assumes the Carriage PCBA was removed in Section 7 6 1     CAUTION    After replacing the Carriage Assembly PCBA  the TLS must be recalibrated after    the Carriage Assembly is reinstalled        501090 Rev  F    1  Align all four mounting screw holes in the new Carriage PCBA with the mount   ing screw holes in the Carriage Assembly  then install all four PCBA mounting  screws  Securely tighten the mounting screws with a number 1 Phillips Screw   driver     2  Plug the CPOPTO cable into the CPOPTO connector  Note that the connector is  keyed     3  With a piece of twine reattach the CPOPTO cable to the circuit board     4  Plug the two gripper solenoid wires onto the GRIPA and GRIPB terminals  Ei   ther wire can be connected to either terminal     5  Plug the Y Axis motor cable into the MOTORY connector   The Y motor is imme   diately adjacent to the MOTORY connector   Note that the connector is polar   ized     6  Plug the Z Axis motor cable into the MOTORZ connector  The Z Axis motor  moves the gripper mechanism  Note that the connector is polarized     7  Ifthe carriage is equipped with a Barcode Reader  align all three mounting  screw holes in the Ba
152. he Leadscrew during disassem   bly  go to step 20     Refer to Figure 7 13 for the remaining steps of this procedure     Place the Polyurethane Enclosure Spacer over the Leadscrew mounting hole in  the top plate     If the Belleville spring washer stack is still inside the Spring Cup  go to step 20   If the spring washer stack is not inside the Spring Cup  use 12 Belleville spring  washers to assemble the spring washer stack as follows     Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 17       a  Remove all of the spring washers from the Spring Cup     b  First  place two Belleville spring washers into the Spring Cup with their con   cave sides facing up  Then  place two more Belleville spring washers into the  cup with their convex sides facing up     c  Repeat step b  two more times  until the spring washer stack looks like the  one shown in Figure 7 13     Belleville Spring Washer Stack      3 sets of 4 washers each   Each washer set has two washers    facing up  and two washers facing  down        Spring Cup    Polyurethane Enclosure Spacer    Upper Leadscrew Retaining Screw    Figure 7 13 The Spring Cup Assembly and Enclosure Spacer    7 18    22  Place the Spring Cup  with 12 Belleville washers  over the Enclosure Spacer  In   sert the Upper Leadscrew Retaining Screw  a 10 32 x 5 8 inch Button Head  Socket Cap screw  into the threaded end of the Leadscrew     NOTE    If the Spring Cup was removed from the top of the Leadscrew during dismantling     When you reinstall the Spring Cup 
153. he TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Open the cabinet door     3  Reach into the cabinet and rotate the right side Carousel by hand until an empty  Carousel face is facing you     4  Position a Receiver over the empty Carousel face and align the mounting screw  holes     5  Insert two 6 32 x 3 8 inch screws  with integral lock washers  into the top set of  Receiver mounting screw holes  then securely tighten with a number 2 Phillips  screwdriver     6  Position a Magazine Anchor  Blue color  at the bottom of the receiver and align  the mounting screw holes     7  Insert two 6 32 x 1 2 inch screws through the Magazine Anchor and into the bot   tom set of Receiver mounting screw holes  then securely tighten with a number 2  Phillips screwdriver     8  Position a Magazine Anchor  Blue color  in the middle of the Receiver and align  the mounting screw holes     9  Insert two 6 32 x 1 2 inch screws through the Magazine Anchor and into the  middle set of Receiver mounting screw holes  then securely tighten with a num   ber 2 Phillips screwdriver     10  Rotate the Carousel by hand 60 degrees to access the next empty Carousel face     11  Repeat steps 4 through 9 until three Receiver Assemblies are installed on all six  Carousel faces of both Carousels     12  Proceed to Section 9 2 2  of this chapter     CAUTION    Do not apply power at this time     Entering the Update Password    CAUTION    After installing new hardware to change the configuration of a library  to prevent 
154. he length    that the red and black wires will be cut to on the replacement Fan Assembly     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    10     11     12     13     14     15     16     501090 Rev  F    Carefully cut the red and black wires on the replacement Fan Assembly to the  length determined in Step 2  Length of old Fan Assemblies wires   a minimum  of one inch      Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the end of the red wire     Fully insert the end of the red wire into a Butt Splice  Panduit Part Number  BSN22 C or equivalent  and use a wire crimper to securely attach the Butt  Splice to the wire  See Figure 7 19     Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the black wire     Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the ends of the red and  black wires in the library that were cut in Step 8 of Section 7 8 4 2     Insert the Fan Assembly into the TLS through the front opening  with the red  and black wires pointing down     Fully insert the end of the red wire into the Butt Splice that is attached to the  red wire of the Fan Assembly  Use a wire crimper to secure the wire in the Butt  Splice  See Figure 7 19     Repeat step 9 for the black wire     Align the Fan Assembly s mounting screw holes with the mounting screw holes  in the TLS and then install the Fan Assembly mounting screws  Thread the nuts  on to the mounting screws and then tighten the Fan Assembly mounting screws   See Figure 7 23     Replace any cable ties and or cable wraps that
155. he power cord   2  Open the cabinet door   3  Remove the Top Panel and both Side Panels  Section 7 4      4  Gently turn the I O port leadscrew by hand to move the I O port slot forward   towards the cabinet door      9 2 TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    Receiver    Remove the four Receiver mounting screws  then remove the Receiver and An   chor  Blue in color   Figure 9 2      From the left and right side of the TLS remove the four Upper Receiver Bracket  mounting screws  then remove the Upper Receiver Bracket  Figure 9 3      From the left and right side of the TLS remove the six Midplate mounting screws   Figure 9 3      From the inside of the TLS remove the six Midplate mounting screws   Figure 9 4   then remove the Midplate from the TLS     oo Upper Receiver Bracket                   E      o dE     8  io   6   5 A  ie   6   o o Receiver Mounting Screws  4        i 2 a Midplate    Tape Drive Bay Sides          Figure 9 2 6210 Receiver    501090 Rev  F    TLS Expansions 9 3    Upper Receiver Bracket mounting screws  4        Left Side of ie eN eae Side of TLS    Midplate mounting screws  6     Figure 9 3 Upper Receiver Bracket mounting screws    9 2 1 1 2 Adding the Carousel Midplate    9 4    1     The Carousel PCBA must be removed before the Carousel Midplate can be in   stalled in the TLS     Detach the Carousel Motor Cable from the Carousel PCBA  Figure 9 5      Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the three Carousel PCBA mounting screws   then remove the PCBA  Figure 9
156. heir range of motion in the TLS     z   V  Executes the PARK LOW command   This command moves the carriages to the bottom of their range of motion in the TLS     3 1 5 1 Operating the I O Port    An I O port must be installed  and enabled  using the CALL Key menu item in the  Configuration Advanced Changer I O Port menu   before the I O port  function can be used     1  While the operating display is visible  Figure 3 1   press and hold down the  28  Daisy  key to view the    Daisy  key display  Figure 3 2   press the MENU  key to extend the I O port slot  then release both keys  The I O port door opens  automatically when the I O port slot extends     PARK HIGH    PARK LOW I O PORT       Figure 3 2 2  Daisy  Key Display    2  Make certain the Write Enable Protect tab on the tape cartridge is set correctly   see Figure 3 3   then fully insert the tape cartridge into the I O port slot as  shown     e When the optical sensors detect a fully inserted tape cartridge  the I O  port slot retracts  closing the I O port door     501090 Rev  F The Menu System 3 3    e Ifthe tape cartridge is not fully inserted  the door will remain open     e If no tape is inserted  the I O port slot retracts one or two minutes after  the I O port is summoned   Use the Configuration Advanced Changer I O Port CALL Key  menu item to select either the one or two minute delay time     3  The host software then determines where the tape cartridge should be stored   The storage location can also be manually
157. hillips screws securing the service panel on the rear of the li   brary     refer to Figure 8 1 below  Care must be taken to not remove the four  screws securing the heatsink panels     Phillips Screws  6     Location of Part Number  on Executive PCBA    Do not remove e  these screws                                                    Figure 8 1 Rear Service Panel and PCBA Part Number Location    Refer to Table 8 1 for a list of the Executive PCBAs board names and their part  numbers  The Executive PCBAs type can be determined by reading the part  number printed on the circuit board  For example  a board with a PCBA NO   501387  printed on it is an Executive III board     The current Executive firmware part number and revision can be determined by  viewing the Display Revision status screen under the Maintenance menu  Follow  the steps in Table 8 2     Service Technician Action  Display     Press the MENU key followed by the W key  Top Menu   Configuration  3 Maintenance    Press the ENTER key followed by the W key  seeeeeee Maintenance       Display Log   Display Prevents    Display Revision       Press the ENTER key  Me e eDisplay Revision    In this example  the firmware part number is  700105 and the revision is 2 11     Date  mm dd yy  Part Number 700105  Revision  Zid 1  Checksum  XXXX    Press the MENU key to return to the top menu        Table 8 2 Steps to View the Display Revision Status Screen    8 2    Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    6     Table 8 3 lists the Exe
158. ibbon cable to SHUTTLE connector on the PCBA  Figure 7 80      6  Reinstall any tape drive assemblies that were removed to access the Shuttle As   semblies mounting screws     7  Align the Drive Access Panels four quarter turn fasteners with the correspond   ing receptacles on the rear panel  then fasten it by turning the quarter turn fas   teners clockwise  Figure 7 81      8  Recalibrate the TLS  see Section 5 3 2 for details      7 23 Shuttle PCBAs    P N 501317 01 2 and 501427 01 7  The Shuttle Assembly must be removed before replacing either of the Shuttle PCBAs   There are two circuit boards on the Shuttle Assembly     Tools Required   e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver  Material Required     e 3 inch x 3 32 inch Cable Ties    7 23 1 Shuttle PCBA Removal    PCBA No  501317 01 2 Shuttle Assembly Label    Mounting Nuts  2        m Sa PCBA No  501427 01 7       Mounting Nuts  2                                                                                                                                             MOTOR Connector Cable Ties    RIGHT Connector PSH Connector    Figure 7 83 Shuttle PCBAs  Shuttle Assembly Bottom View     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 107    1  Remove the Shuttle Assembly  see Section 7 22 1 for details      NOTE    In steps two and four below  the spacers under the PCBAs    come loose when the PCBA mount     ing nuts are removed        2  To remove PCBA No  501317 01 2  carefully cut the cable tie which attaches the  RIGHT connector
159. ible within the adjustment should work  However  you could try  to loosen the screws holding the emitter and detector  and while looking at the  CRTPRS value in the Private Display A D Left or Right menu  try to maximize  the signal  Retighten the screws and retry calibration     6 3 3 During Calibration  the alert  Clear Sensor Fail appears on the control  panel display     The I O port clear sensor is located in the mouth of the I O port  and detects when a  cartridge is partially inserted in the opening     Possible causes   1  The bracket holding the LED for the I O port clear sensor is bent     2  The cable connecting the I O port PCBA to the I O port emitter PCBA is discon   nected or damaged     3  The I O port emitter PCBA has failed     4  The I O port PCBA has failed     6 3 4 During Calibration  the alert IFull Sensor Fail appears on the control  panel display     The I O port full sensor is located about 4 cm inside the mouth of the I O port  and de   tects when a cartridge is fully inserted in the opening     Possible causes   1  The bracket holding the LED for the I O port full sensor is bent     2  The cable connecting the I O port PCBA to the I O port emitter PCBA is discon   nected or damaged     3  The I O port emitter PCBA has failed     4  The I O port PCBA has failed     6 3 5 During Calibration  the alert Calibration Failed appears on the control  panel display   During calibration  the library    feels    for the height of some of the storage slots to  
160. ician     Synchronized TRUE FALSE   When an inventory item is modified on one side of the library  the data is first  only in the corresponding sides Executive PCBA  The data will not be trans   ferred to the opposite sides Executive PCBA until a synchronization occurs     Type Data This value indicates the type of element that is at the selected location   DRIVE  HANDLER  I O PORT  or magazine SLOT     Tape Ejected TRUE FALSE   When the Type value is set to DRIVE  this value is displayed for the drive at  the selected location  The default value is FALSE  However  if the most re   cent inventory scan found a tape ejected from the drive  this value will be    TRUE        Table 5 4 Private Display Locations Data    501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 19    5 4 12 The Private Display Positions Status Screen    P  Display Positions   Left  IS  tddddd  X  tddddqd    Ys tddddd  Period Y  ddddd     is  tddddd  Period Z  ddddd          In a dual bay library the Display Positions status screen initially displays the current  position of the four motor driven positioners for the right side  The left side Positions       are visible by selecting   LEFT and pressing the ENTER key  Single bay libraries will  simply display the Positions information     The positions are given in motor steps  counted from the home position of each axis   There are 24 steps per revolution for the Vertical  Y  Axis and Insertion  Z  Axis mo   tors  There are 200 steps per revolution for the I O port axis and c
161. ield   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Mounting  Screws  6        IOPORT Connector  Oe    FRONT Connector Sr   al    Executive PCBA sea                                                                         o  B c a                                         Figure 7 34 TLS Rear View    501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 49    I O Port Cable  Handler Power Supply                                                                                                                                                                          Rear Handler Power Supply Label  Protective Screen Switch Bracket  FRONT  Cabl  Mounting Screws  4  ge     Cable  2 Wire Cable  Connector             Protective  Screen  Switch Bracket          FRONT  Cable Power Cable Ee  Connector e  Power Supply  e Mounting Screws  4    q D   O Port Cable  Front  Power Cable     Power Cable 2 Wire Cable  Connector Potential Cable Connector Locations Connector Connector                            T 2 Wire Cable  Connector                                                   e ic   Power Cable Power Cable RA  Connector Connector Screws  2  Connector  Yellow Wires         Brown Wires  2 Wire Cable Power Cable  Connector Connector    Figure 7 35 The Handler Power Supply     54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx Series    7 13 4 Single Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement    54xx  62xx  64xx  82xx and 84xx Models    1  Lower the Power Supply down into place on top of the TLS     7 50 Field   Replaceable Units
162. igure 7 5   which are mounted on the floor of the cabi   net        1  Locate the Guide Shafts  The Guide Shafts are identical  Note that the top end of  each Guide Shaft has a white spacer applied to it  while the bottom end of each  Guide Shaft is bare metal     2  Place the orange rubber bushing  removed in Section 7 5 1  over the front Guide  Shaft hole in the bottom plate     3  Insert the bottom end of one Guide Shaft  the end without the white spacer  into  the front Guide Shaft hole in the top plate  Figure 7 4 or Figure 7 5   then gently  lower the Guide Shaft down through the hole  This is best accomplished by rest   ing the hand holding the shaft on the top plate  and then guiding the shaft from  inside the TLS with the other hand     4  Hold the front Guide Shaft about 10 inches above the bottom plate with the left  hand  Insert the Carriage Assembly into the cabinet and slide the front Guide  Shaft through the front Guide Shaft Bearing  Lower the front Guide Shaft down  through the orange rubber bushing and into the hole in the bottom plate     NOTE    In the next step a small mirror may be helpful to view the hole in the Carriage PCBA as it ap     proaches the Vertical  Y  Axis Home Sensor Probe        501090 Rev  F    5  Slowly lower the Carriage Assembly  while using a gentle rocking motion  until  the Vertical  Y  Axis Home Sensor Probe  Figure 7 4 or Figure 7 5  fits into the  hole in the Carriage PCBA  Figure 7 14   and the Carriage Assembly rests on the  o
163. igure 7 9 TLS Carriage Assembly P N 501196 01 8    501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 13    Spring Cup Assembly    and Enclosure Washer Top Plate Handler Power Supply           Front Rear    sS I O Port Cable    1 0 Port Full Clear  Sensor Cable       Guide Shaft Switch Bracket    i    Front Panel Cable   E aaa Strike Plates  2  Guide Shaft Strike Plate    Mounting Screws  4              Figure 7 10 Single Bay TLS Cabinet     Top View  Top Panel Removed     Y Clear Detector  PCBA Cable    Blower Power Supply I O Port Cable       Switch Bracket   Front Panel Cable        Guide Shaft    Handler 4 Strike Plates  6     Power Supplies    Y Clear Detector PCBA     A   wy       Top Plate     1    eza a 52  Guide Shaft Strike Plate  Mounting Screws  12                             Switch Bracket   Front Panel Cable        Spring Cup Assembly 1 0 Port Full Clear  and Enclosure Washer  2  Sensor Cable    Figure 7 11 Dual Bay TLS Cabinet     Top View  Top Panel Removed     7 14 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 5 2 Carriage Assembly Replacement    This procedure assumes that a Carriage Assembly was removed in Section 7 5 1     CAUTION    Recalibrate the TLS after replacing a Carriage Assembly     Be very careful not to damage a Vertical Axis Home sensor while removing a Car     riage Assembly  There is very little clearance between the sensors  underneath  and to the rear of the Carriage Assemblies  and the Vertical Axis Home Sensor  Probes  Figure 7 4 and F
164. imes that the drive carrier has sent a  packet of information to the Executive PCBA     e Cart Present  YES NO   When the Cart Present value is YES  the DLT tape drive has a cartridge present in  it    e COM Problem  YES NO     When the COM Problem value is YES  there is a problem with the communications  between the tape drive and the drive carrier     e Configured  YES NO   When the Configured value is YES  the tape drive has been configured and has had  it   s SCSI ID set     e Door Open  YES NO   When the Door Open value is YES  the tape cartridge door is open on the DLT tape    drive     e Door Openable  YES NO   When the Door Openable value is YES  the tape cartridge door on the DLT tape  drive is ready to be opened     501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 25    e Fan Problem  YES NO   When the Fan Problem value is YES  the cooling fan on the DLT tape drive is not  functioning or not operating correctly     e Hardware Error  YES NO   When the Hardware Error value is YES  a hardware fault has occurred in the DLT  tape drive     e ID Correct  YES NO   When the ID Correct value is YES  the tape drive has reported it   s SCSI ID as being  the same one that it was assigned  This feature is used primarily for diagnostics     e In Flux  YES NO   When the In Flux value is YES  the DLT tape drive can not ensure that the re   turned status values are valid except for the Hardware Error value  This will re   main after initialization until the tape drive determines it has either no ca
165. ing 501090 Rev  F    6 3 1 During Calibration  the alert YClear Fail appears on the control panel  display     The calibration sequence blocks and unblocks the path of the Y clear light beams  and  reads the sensor output level to determine proper operation  and to calculate a  threshold for detecting a blocked condition  This fault indicates that a sensor or emit   ter is not functioning correctly     Possible causes     1  An emitter assembly at the bottom of the cabinet is not properly connected to the  Drive Bay PCBA     2  A Drive Bay PCBA is not properly connected to the Executive PCBA     3  The sensor gain select jumpers on the I O port PCBA are in the wrong position   Most models have a jumper you can set on the I O port PCBA to set the sensitiv   ity of the sensor  On some models without I O ports  or on the left side of some  dual bay models  there may be a special sensor PCBA under the top cover of the  machine  or in place of the I O port PCBA  Typically  libraries with one story of  magazines should be set on    S     and libraries with more than one should be set  on    T     If a library is set correctly to the    S    position and stills fails calibration  with this problem  try moving the jumper to the    T    position and recalibrating     4  Something is blocking a Y Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  optical path   5  A Y Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  emitters do not work     6  A Y Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  detector circui
166. ining two Bracket screws the  same way     7  Install two tape drive assemblies into the TLS in the drive bays that correspond  to the PCBA that is being installed  Carefully align the Tape Drive Connector   s  on the Drive Bay PCBA with the mating connector   s on the tape drive assemblies   Figure 7 64   It may be necessary to move the Drive Bay PCBA Bracket to prop   erly align the connectors  Refer to Chapter 5 in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installa   tion and Operation Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more infor   mation on tape drive assembly installation     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 83    8  Confirm that the Tape Drive Connector   s on both tape drive assemblies are fully  inserted into the mating connectors on the on the Drive Bay PCBA    9  Using a long number 2 Phillips screwdriver reach through the access holes  and or opening in the side of the TLS and tighten the three Drive Bay PCBA  Bracket screws  Figure 7 61     10  Remove the Tape Drive Assemblies from the TLS   11  Reconnect all cables to the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 60    12  Replace the Tape Drive Power Supply or Supplies  Section 7 15 2    13  Replace the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4    14  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2    Tape Drive  Assemblies  Drive Bay  Opening  Tape Drive  Connectors       Figure 7 64 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Models Drive Bay with Tape Drive Assemblies   Right Side  Shown    7 17 7 3 Left Side Drive Bay PCBA Removal    7 84    1     2     Turn off the TLS p
167. ink panels six mounting screw holes with the six  threaded holes in the rear on the TLS     4  Using a Phillips screwdriver  secure Q Link to the rear of the TLS using the six  screws removed earlier  Refer to Figure 7 78     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 103    7 22 Shuttle Assembly    TLS 58xxx P N 500189 03 0  Revision B or later   TLS 68xxx P N 500189 02 2  TLS 88xxx P N 500189 03 0    7 22 1 Shuttle Assembly Removal  A Shuttle Assembly is only found in TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  libraries   Tools Required   e Flat Blade Screwdriver    e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    2 Mounting Screws accessible Carousel Gear Guards Midplate  from top of Midplate           Shuttle  Connector  z 7 By  Shuttle m n    Assembly ba    V             Front of TLS       4 Mounting Screws accessible  from below the Midplate    Figure 7 80 Top View of Shuttle Assembly    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners on  the access cover on the right side of the library when looking at it from the rear   Figure 7 81   Carefully remove the access cover     7 104 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Access Panel    1 4 Turn Fasteners   4 for each panel     AC Power   e m F ON je    Receptacle    Figure 7 81 Rea    10     501090 Rev  F    If present  remove tape drive assemblies from the top location in the left and  right side drive bays     Reach into the TLS throu
168. isplay Revision Status Screen    4 6 Maintenance Display Stats  Status Screen    501090 Rev  F    The Display Prevents Status screen displays the Initiator number  host SCSI ID  of  every host that has issued a Prevent Allow Medium Removal SCSI command with it   s  Prevent Bit set  Setting this bit completely disables the I O port  This menu allows    one to determine who disabled the I O port     M   Display Revision  mm dd yyyy    Dat    e     Part Number 700105  Revision  d dd  Checksum  XXXX    The Display Revision status screen displays the current revision level of the operating  firmware and the unique identification number of the TLS  The values displayed in     clude     e Date     This is the release date of the current firmware     e Part Number     This is the manufacturing part number of the current firmware     e Revision     This is the revision number of the current firmware     e Checksum        This is the checksum value of the current firmware   It takes a second to calculate    this value      Display Stats      Left    Ri  Abo  Doo  Exc  Fil  Gri  EC       Is  Min    ght  rts     rOpn   hang     ter   ps     Moves     Pic  Pla       KS   ces     PowerOn    Res  C    S    S    etsi    mnds   Moves   teps   Moves   teps     dddddddddd    Moves    S    teps     Maintenance Menu    alls   I Moves   teps   utes     dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd  dddddddddd     
169. ith  the PCBA Mounting Studs  Figure 7 48      NOTE    In the next step  only finger tighten the nuts  The PCBA needs to be loosely held to the PCBA    Mounting Studs        2  Install a washer by hand or with long nose pliers onto a PCBA Mounting Stud   then with a 1 4 inch nutdriver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  thread PCBA  Mounting Nuts onto the PCBA Mounting Studs  Install the remaining PCBA  Mounting screws the same way  Figure 7 48      3  Install a tape drive assembly into the TLS being careful to align the Tape Drive  Connector on the Drive Bay PCBA with its mating connector on the tape drive  assembly  It may be necessary to move the Drive Bay PCBA to properly align the  connectors  Refer to Chapter 5 in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Op   eration Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more information on  tape drive assembly installation     4  Look through the top of the TLS    frame to confirm that the Tape Drive Connector  on the tape drive assembly is fully inserted into its mating connector on the  Drive Bay PCBA     5  With a 1 4 inch nutdriver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  reach through the  two access holes in the rear of the TLS and tighten the PCBA Mounting Nuts  onto the PCBA Mounting Studs     6  Remove the tape drive assembly from the TLS     7  Access the remaining two PCBA Mounting Nuts from the drive bay opening and  tighten them     8  Reconnect all the cables to the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 48    9  Replace the Tape Drive Po
170. ity locks  Configuration  Inventory  Master and  Door  The  Configuration Security menu  shown below  is used to set the  Configuration  Inventory  and Master security locks to ON or OFF  the de   fault value is OFF   The Door lock is controlled by opening or closing the cabinet   s  door  Open is OFF     Coeeeeeeeee Security  Configuration  ON    Inventory  ON  Master  ON       NOTE    All items in the  Configuration Security menu are locked by the Door lock     5 2 1 Door Lock    When the cabinet   s door is closed  the Door lock is ON  and the items in the   Configuration Security menu cannot be changed     5 2 2 Master Lock    The Master lock provides the maximum system security  When the Master lock is  ON  the TLS    control keys cannot be used to change the TLS    configuration  initiate  any operations  or execute any commands  Only the host system can control the TLS   which effectively configures the TLS for remote operation only     5 2 3 Disabling the Master Security Lock    NOTE    See the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar document number    501450  for details about the TLS Security options        Follow the instructions below  which assume that all TLS security locks are set to ON   to disable the Master security lock     1  Open the cabinet door  to disable the Door lock      2  Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu     501090 Rev  F The Private Menu 5 3    Top Menu   Configuration      Maintenance    Operation       3  Press 
171. l   lowed to operate        1  Make sure that the cabinet door is open  then reconnect the power cord and turn  on the TLS power     NOTE    Both the  12V and  5V LEDs at the top of the Executive board must light  Confirm that the    Front Panel display lights and that characters are displayed        2  Inspect the label on the rear   panel to determine the unit   s model number     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    NOTE    If the TLS was upgraded in the field to a larger model  the rear   panel label may not indicate the    correct  current model number        3  Inspect the label on the Carriages to determine their revision levels   e g   Carriage  B   See Figure 7 46     4  Ifa Barcode Reader or Readers are installed  inspect the labels to determine  model numbers  e g   WA3700 B 2221   See Figure 7 46     5  Inspect the label on the I O port assembly to determine its revision level   e g   I O Port  A   See Figure 7 47     6  On dual bay models  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx   inspect the label on the Shuttle  Assembly to determine its revision level  e g   Shuttle  A   See Figure 7 83     7  Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 1 to enter Update for the password in the  Private menu     8  Enter the Configuration Advanced Changer Mechanics menu                                             el  Ses  Carriage Assembly Label     Label    E          Carriage Assembly   Top View     Figure 7 45 Carriage Assembly Label    501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7
172. l the screws removed in Section 7 4 1  step 4     Close the cabinet door     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 5    7 4 3 Side Panel Removal  Left or Right     1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Open the cabinet door   Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      When removing the right Side Panel  remove the screws from the front of the  Side Panel  Figure 7 1B and Figure 7 2B      NOTE    The left Side Panel does not have front mounting screws  as shown for the right Side Panel in    Figure 7 1B and Figure 7 2B        5     If your TLS has 1 4 inch nuts inside the left Side Panel  Figure 7 3   remove  them     For either Side Panel  remove the screws from the top  bottom and back edges of  the Side Panel Figure 7 1C and Figure 7 2C     Lift the Side Panel off of the TLS        x  7            Z td    A             Front   58xxx 68xxx 88xxx shown     Figure 7 3 Left Side Panel Nuts  Some single bay models do not have these nuts      Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 4 4 Side Panel Replacement  Left or Right     501090 Rev  F    1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Open the cabinet door   For either Side Panel  place the Side Panel  left or right side  on the TLS     If you are replacing the right Side Panel  replace the screws removed in  Section 7 4 3  step 4     If you are replacing the left Side Panel  and any 1 4 inch nuts were removed in  Section 7 4 3  step 5  replace them now     For either Side Panel 
173. lange  9 RS485A  ger  RS485B ma eee  Heat Sink Flange   pe  Mounting Screws  4  x A A SA2  Sa            84851   CAROSL     WADAPT  NS OPTO  O e ee oe  DRVBAY zE 7 CVD SE PWRDST  Hole for cable tie which attaches 12V  12V FANS wires to PCBA FANS    Figure 7 43 Executive IV PCBA    7 16 1    Executive PCBA Removal    Refer to Figure 7 42 or Figure 7 43     The TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain two Executive PCBAs   Printed Circuit Board Assemblies  referred to as the left and right Executive PCBAs  when viewed from the front of the TLS  The replacement procedure that follows will  apply to replacing Executive PCBAs in either single bay or dual bay libraries  making    note of specific operations when required     Refer to Table 7 4 for a list of the Executive PCBAs board names and their part num   bers  The Executive PCBAs type can be determined by reading the part number   printed on the circuit board  For example  a board with a PCBA NO  501387  printed  on it is an Executive III board     501090 Rev  F    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     7 61    7 62    Executive III 501387 01 3  Executive IV 501447 01 5    Table 7 4 Executive PCBA Identification       Tools Required   e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver  e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver    Material Required     e 38 inch x 3 32 inch Cable Ties    NOTICE    If a history of the configuration changes that were made at the time of initial  TLS installation is not available  and if the menu system is still operational
174. lar  All values are decimal counts  of the number of times an event has occurred     4 8 Maintenance Display Voltage Status Screen    501090 Rev  F    M    Display Voltage   Left   Right    3 3V     5V     12V           In a dual bay library the Display Voltage status screen initially displays the three  power supply voltages on the right side Executive circuit board  Select the Left sub   menu to see the voltages on the left Executive circuit board  Single bay libraries will  simply display the three lines of voltage status information     The  12V supply is the output from the Handler power supply or supplies  The   5Vand  3 3V supplies are the output of voltage regulators on Executive PCBA   s  The    Maintenance Menu 4 9    4 9    presence  but not the value  of all three supplies are indicated by LEDs on each Ex   ecutive PCBA     Maintenance Test Inventory Status Screen    Test Inventory    Cartridges  ddddd      Labels  ddddd    CLEAR  START  STOP             The Test Inventory operation allows continuous scans of the TLS  Updates to the    Cartridges and   Labels occurs at the end of each scan  The   cartridges  and   Labels are accumulated values  The increment that occurs for each scan  should match the physical contents of the TLS  The Test Inventory menu is only visi   ble if an access word has been entered into the TLS   See Sections 5 3 1 and 5 3 2        Perform a CLEAR command to clear the contents of the two accumulators  Perform a  START command to start the
175. lers revision tracking name to be entered which will re   place the system   s default menu display text  X XX      e CLEAR  Evoking the CLEAR command will eliminate all data entries in the  Private Defaults menu and all the systems menu display text will return to the sys   tem defaults     The Private Configuration SCSI Menu    The Private SCSI menu provides a means of fine tuning the time delay and num   ber of retries used when moving cartridges in and out of tape drives  Adjusting the  values in this menu can help to reduce some of the problems associated with inflexible  host software  Both decimal values are editable     P Configuration SCSI  PostPlaceDly ddddd    PrePickRetries ddd       The PostPlaceD1y value is a period of time  measured in 250ts of a second  It de   termines the delay from the physical insertion of a tape cartridge into a tape drive  to  the notification to the host computer that the cartridge movement has is completed  A  longer value gives the tape drive more time to change its status from    empty    to    load   ing a tape     The default value is 250 or one second     Sometimes a tape drive is slow to eject a tape cartridge  after the tape drive notifies the  host computer that it has finished the ejection sequence  The PrePickRetries value   measured at one retry per second  controls the number of times  and seconds  the Han   dler will look for the ejected tape cartridge with its Cartridge Presence opto sensor  The  default value is 10  or t
176. lert Cart Jammed appears on the control panel display  and there is no   cartridge in a Handler s Gripper           c ccccccessssssesescsessssscsesesesesesesesesesesesesesesereneees 6 2 6  The alert Handler Jammed appears on the control panel display  and a   CALtVIAKE 18 1M A ripper  sariri esre rE E E Eae PESE E E a aa 6 2 7  The alert Handler Jammed appears on the control panel display              cceceeeeseeeeeeees 6 2 8  The alert Vertcl Axis Jammed appears on the control panel display                    6 6 2 9  The alert Not Clear appears on the control panel display                ccccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 10  The alert Ioport Jammed appears on the control panel display             eeeeeserteees 6 2 11  The alert YClear Fail appears on the control panel display                  cc csececeeeeeeeeeees 6 3 1  The alert Crtprs Sensor Fail appears on the control panel display                   00 6 3 2  The alert IClear Sensor Fail appears on the control panel display                    6 6 3 3  The alert IFull Sensor Fail appears on the control panel display                     00668 6 3 4  The alert Calibration Failed appears on the control panel display                    06 6 3 5          Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    6 1 Power Up and Initialization Failures    When the library s power is first turned on  it does a Power On Sequence Test and  then scans the inventory  The errors in this section occur during the power   on inventory taking process     6 1 1 When
177. les in the Barcode Reader facing up     Install both BCR mounting screws  6 32 x 1 4 inch Flathead screws   Use a  number 2 Phillips screwdriver to securely tighten both BCR mounting screws     Align the mounting screw holes in the Barcode Reader Mounting Plate with the  mounting screw holes in the Carriage Assembly     Install all three Barcode Reader Mounting Plate screws  Use a number 1 Phillips  screwdriver to securely tighten the mounting screws     Connect the Barcode Reader Cable to the jack in the back of the Barcode Reader     Close the cabinet door     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 23    7 8    7 8 1    7 24    Air Filter and Fan Assembly    Single Fan Air Filter P N 500584 02 4  Dual Fan Air Filter P N 500584 01 6  Fan Assembly P N 604 0013 2    TLS models 6110 and 8111 contain a single Fan Assembly while models 62xx and  82xx contain two Fan Assemblies  These Fan Assemblies are located in the front panel  and are accessible when the cabinet door is open  Models 54xx  64xx and 84xx contain  four Fan Assemblies in the front panel and an additional two Fan Assemblies in the  rear of the unit  The dual bay 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx models contain a Blower As   sembly and filters  which are discussed in Section 7 8 4 2     Tools Required     e Flat blade Screwdriver   e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver   e Tape Measure or 12 inch Scale   e Diagonal Wire Cutters   e Wire Strippers  24 AWG Capable   e Wire Crimpers  24 AWG Capable     Material Required     e 3 inch x 3 32
178. ling the    Carousel Motor mounting screws        3  Use a 7 64 inch Allen wrench to install and securely tighten all four Carousel  Motor mounting screws     4  Reconnect the Carousel Motor cable to the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 73      CAUTION    Be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor with the Carousel Gear    Guard when you reinstall the Carousel  Figure 7 67         5  Align the lower Carousel Bearing with the TLS Midplate  then lower the Carou   sel down into place  Figure 7 75   Be sure to align the Carousel Gear with the  gear on the Carousel Motor shaft as you lower the Carousel into position     6  Align the Upper Carousel Bearing with the Upper Carousel Pivot Support  then  lower the Upper Carousel Pivot Support down through the top of the TLS onto  the Upper Carousel Pivot  Figure 7 75      7  Align the mounting screw holes in the Upper Carousel Pivot Support with the  mounting screw holes in the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to  install all three Upper Carousel Pivot Support mounting screws  Figure 7 74      8  Ifthe right side Carousel Motor is being replaced  follow the procedure in section  7 10 2 to replace the I O port assembly     9  For each Magazine Anchor that was removed  use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to remove the two Receiver Mounting Screws  Position a Magazine Anchor  at the bottom of the receiver and align the mounting screw holes  Insert the two  Receiver Mounting Screws through the Magazine Anchor and tighten 
179. lower Assembly Removal Replacement    7 10 1 O Port Assembly  TLS 5000 and 58xxx  SAIT  P N 501195 02 8  Revision B or later   TLS 6000 and 68xxx  DLT  P N 501195 01 0  P N 501195 02 8    TLS 8000 and 88xxx  LTO     Tools Required   Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 38    I O Port  Mounting Screws  6           Rear       LED Cable                   I O Port Cable    Figure 7 28 Single Bay TLS Cabinet   Top View                                                 Rear  EL I O Port Cable       I O Port  Mounting Screws  6   Front    LED Cable    Figure 7 29 Dual Bay TLS Cabinet      Top View    501090 Rev  F Field    Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 39    7 10 1 1 O Port Assembly Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Open the cabinet door     3  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      NOTE    If you remove the Right side Panel  Section 7 4 3   the holes in the side of the TLS    frame give  easy access to the I O port cable s plug     On dual bay models  removing any magazines that are mounted on the top row of the right side  carousel will also allow for easier access to the I O port Assembly        4  Gently turn the I O port leadscrew by hand to move the I O port slot forward   towards the cabinet door  to gain access to the IOPORT ribbon cable connector   Do not extend the I O port slot all the way forward     5  Unplug the I O port ribbon cable from the I O port PCBA  Figure 2 10      6  Support the I 
180. m the rear of the TLS     Power Supply    Mounting Screws  4  Power Cable Connector          Yellow Wires             Protective Screen             2 Wire Cable  Connector          Brown Wires             Screen Mounting   Screws  4  Power Cable  Connector Screws  2     Handler Power Supply Label                                              2 Wire Cable 2 Wire Cable  Connector Connector  Potential  Cable Connector  Locations  Power Cable Power Cable  Connector Connector    Figure 7 38 Handler Power Supply  Top View  as seen from the rear of the TLS     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 53    7 13 6 Dual Bay Handler Power Supply Replacement    1  Lower the Power Supply down into place on top of the TLS     NOTE    Make sure that the Power Supply is turned so that the connectors on its PCBA are facing in the    lower left and upper right corners  as seen from the back of the TLS  Figure 7 38         2  Install all four Power Supply mounting screws  Figure 7 38   When installing the  left side screws make sure that the cable clips are replaced as shown in Figure  7 37     3  Reconnect the Power Cable and the 2   Wire Cable connector to the Power Supply  PCBA  Figure 7 38   For 500826 05 2 models only position the power cable ring  lugs wires over the terminals with the yellow wires at the top position and the  brown wires at the bottom  Use a Phillips or flat screwdriver to replace the two  screws removed earlier     4  Place the protective Screen on top of the Po
181. mmanid             cccccccccceesesseceeeeeeceeeensaees 4 4  4 3 Maintenance Display Log Display Entry Menu     sssesesesesesesesssesssssssesesesesesesesesesssso 4 5  4 4 Maintenance Display Prevents Status SCLreen          ccccccsccssccscesssssscecesccsesessesssseeeeees 4 6  4 5 Maintenance Display Revision Status Screen            ccccccccccecssessssseccecececsesessssseeeeseess 4 7  4 6 Maintenance Display Stats  Status Screen            cccccssssccccecssesesensscecececsesesssseseeeeeees 4 7  4 7 Maintenance Display Stats   Left or Right  Status Screen          ccccccessceeeesseeeeeeees 4 9  4 8 Maintenance Display Voltage Status Screen             cccccsssscccccscsessssscecesececesenerssseeeeecs 4 9  49 Maintenance Test Inventory Status Screen       cccccsssscececeeeeseesssssceeesecseserssees 4 10  4 10 Maintenance Test Keyboard Status Screen          ccccessssscccccessessscecceecccesesensseeeeees 4 10  4 11 Maintenance Test LC Display Status Screen           ccccccccccccsssssssceceeeeceeseserssaeeeeees 4 11  5  The Private  Menuiisis ccscccsssisecscessstccdecsccscatccsatedsnssevsenesvencdescsesssdecsuadseagdcevedeesseseceutceen ters 5 1  Bil   Introduction sierden iadi eA a La SLL 5 2  5 2 Defeating Security Locks  0         ccccecccccccccesssesensecececececeesenssceeesecseeensesssaeeeecesesenetsaeeeeess 5 3  Drk Door DOCE ranra a aa ES A AA E EAE E AER 5 3  B22   Master Nock anari a a E AE ea E AAE AEA A a 5 3  5 2 3 Disabling the Master Security Lock            cceccescc
182. mperature inside of the drive carrier     Temp Outside  The Temp Outside value represents the temperature outside of the drive carrier     The Private Menu 5 23    12V    Divide this value by 17 1 to determine the approximate value of the 12V power    supply for the tape drives     5V    Divide this value by 34 1 to determine the approximate value of the 5V power sup     ply for the tape drives     Lost Replies    Indicates the number of unanswered messages from the Drive Bay processor to the    Executive board via the I2C bus     5 4 14 3 The Private DriveBay  T  Status Menu    5 24    Cart Present   COM Problem   Configured   Door Open    Door Openable   Fan Problem   Hardware Error   ID Correct    In Flux    eeds Cleaning   OED   Ready    State  ID  Temp Problem   Unloaded    Volt Problem              The Private Menu    HO O80 O O 0  07 0 0  O OO                OOO       when certain tape drive models are installed  Refer to Table 5 5     Not all of the above menu items will appear all of the time  Some will only appear    501090 Rev  F    Menu Item Tape Drive Models    earen   o   o  configured   x    o   x _   brosn    e   S  boros   J x S         iY       S     d  wee   J Tooo  Ferom   J e o ooo  mewe   J e o               d  weoma   J o So  mw o e e      Needs Ceenng   J x x _   it  eoe e eo e  ea l 7 C Ta  se    qx ooo  waa   x   o  x      Table 5 5 The Private DriveBay  T  Status Menu Items and Tape Drives       e Updates  The Updates value indicates the amount of t
183. mselves  This means that carousels attempt to find the small  slots in their gear guard using the opto sensors on the carousel PCBA  and align  themselves with one of these slots  They count the number of stepper motor steps be   tween the slots  to verify proper operation  Any problem in this process results in this  alert  If the carousel turns for a while then stops with this alert  this indicates that  the library was unable to find all the slots on the gear guard     Possible causes   1  The Carousel Position Sensor pair on the Carousel PCBA is bent or damaged     2  The slots in the Carousel s gear guard are damaged  or blocked by a foreign ob   ject  like a label     3  The cable from an Executive PCBA to the Carousel PCBA is damaged or discon   nected     4  An Executive PCBA has failed     6 1 17 When the power is turned on  the alert ZHome Fail appears on the con     trol panel display  and the Insertion Axis is all the way back  nearest the  cabinet door      When the power is turned on  the library attempts to drive the grippers  Z Axis  all  the way toward the door  then it verifies that the Z home sensor detects the gripper  assemblies  This error results if this process fails     Possible causes   1  One of the Z Axis Home Sensor pair is bent or damaged     2  A Carriage cable is damaged     Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    6 1 18 When the power is turned on  the alert ZHome Fail appears on the con   trol panel display  and the Insertion Axis is not all the way
184. must be manually  re entered     The contents of the Configuration  Advanced Changer Mechanics menu  may change in future revisions of the TLS firmware  Always make sure that all the menu  items match the installed hardware        7 16 4 Recalibrating the TLS    1  After making sure that the unit is properly configured  see Section 7 16 3   close  the cabinet door     NOTE    For units with firmware revision 1 22 or earlier  after changing the unit s configuration  switch    the TLS power off and then back on before calibrating the unit  This procedure ensures proper  operation of the CALIBRATE command in step two below        2  Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 2 to recalibrate the unit     3  Follow the instructions in Section 5 3 3 to clear any existing passwords  to pre   vent unauthorized access to the Private menu     7 17 Drive Bay PCBA    6110 and 8111 models P N 501297 01 4  62xx and 82xx models P N 501257 01 8  54xx  64xx and 84xx models  Upper Bay Board  P N 501257 01 8    54xx  64xx and 84xx models  Lower Bay Board  P N 501257 02 6  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx models  Upper Bay Board  P N 501257 03 4  58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx models  Lower Bay Board  P N 501257 02 6  TLS models 6110  62xx  8111 and 82xx contain a single Drive Bay PCBA while 54xx   64xx and 84xx models contain two PCBAs  The dual bay 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  models contain four PCBAs  two for the right side drive bay and two for the left side  drive bay     Tools Required   e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver  
185. n 2 1    TLS 6000 Feature Model 6110 6210   6220   6430   6460   68120   68240  pommes a e S e a a a    Media capacity in cartridges 10   10 moa  e per ragane      Barcode Readers    A See    I O Port for ee cartridge  insertion removal   Carousel s  e   poston of magazines     ee eee oR S    Table 2 2 SDLT based TLS 6000 Features    TLS 8000 Feature Model 8111 8211 8222   8433   8466   88132   88264  Cu SER    Media capacity in cartridges   11 ao per magazine     Barcode Readerts    poe or far for fo fo fo       I O Port for automated cartridge  insertion removal    Carousel s   rotary AUT of magazines     Number of Cartridge Handlers    Fibre Channel Option te tee Ki EEN    Q Link Remote Manager   Opt    Opt    Opt    Opt    Opt    Opt  Opt        Table 2 3 LTO based TLS 8000 Features    Series Identifier  Maximum Number of Drives  Maximum Number of Cartridges in Magazines    in    TLS 00000    Figure 2 2 Model Number Identification Scheme    This manual applies to all models  The installation and operation of the various mod   els is virtually identical  Models 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx are referred to as dual bay  libraries because of their dual Drive Bays  All other models are single bay libraries   Differences among the models are noted where required     2 2 Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    6110  8111 22 9   58 2 13 1   33 3 24 9   63 2 58   26 3 90   40 8    6210  6220 34 7   88 1 13 1  33 3   24 9   63 2 89   40 3 125   56 7   8211  8222  5433  5466 
186. nd 88xxx models contain four PCBAs  two for the right    side drive bay and two for the left side drive bay  as seen from the front of the library      Because of the different disassembly requirements for replacing the PCBAs  the pro     cedures that follow have been divided into left and right sides     7 17 7 1 Right Side Drive Bay PCBA Removal    1     2     Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1    Remove the right Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section 7 4 3      Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners on  the access cover on the left side as seen from the rear  Figure 7 59   Carefully  remove the access cover     Drive Access  Panels  2                                         wo          oO        Tai  o  0     gt  _ 4         1 4 turn Fasteners   4 for each panel                                                     Figure 7 59 Access Panels on rear of Dual Bay TLS    7 80    Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    5  Remove tape drive assemblies  if installed in the right side drive bays of the TLS     6  Remove one or both of the Tape Drive Power Supplies to allow easy access to the  PCBAs  Section 7 15 1      7  Disconnect all cables from the Drive Bay PCBA being removed  Figure 7 60      8  Through the access holes and or the opening in the right side of the TLS use a  long number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the three Drive Bay PCBA Bracket  screws for
187. ng the inside of the library is placed in the same direction as it was when it  was removed  Reversing the direction of an old Air Filter may cause dirt to be  transferred into the library     b  If you want to remove the Fan Assembly  leave the Air Filter and Air Filter  Clamp off of the TLS and continue on to Section 7 8 2     Replace the Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the single quarter turn  fastener clockwise  See Figure 7 16     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 25    7 8 2 Fan Assembly Removal for 6110  62xx  8111 and 82xx Models    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Open the cabinet door     3  Use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the single quarter turn fastener at the top of  the Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise     4  Remove the Air Filter Clamp and air filter from the TLS     5  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1   then remove the right Side Panel   Section 7 4 3   The openings in the right side of the TLS    frame give access to the  nuts on the back of the Fan Assembly s mounting screws     NOTE    In the next step  the nuts on the back of the mounting screws come loose when the screws are re     moved        6  Remove all the Fan Assembly mounting screws  Figure 7 17          Front Opening         e    ae e ne   4    Upper Fan Assembly    Mounting Screws  2   _         Fan Assembly    Mounting Screws  2                 Lower Fan Assembly  j Mounting Screws  2        6110  amp  8111 62xx  amp  82xx  Figure 7 17 Fan Assembly M
188. nserted into the socket     Replace the access panel and secure it with the six Phillips screws   Connect the power cord and switch the power on     Go to the Maintenance Display Revision menu and verify the firmware  P N and Revision are correct     Firmware Updating 8 13    wW              HK 1   S5 A   a me       VV H    AT       il              m siji a mse   SRR baa  ols t        Figure 8 16 501387 01 8 Executive III or 501447 01 5 Executive IV PCBAs    8 14 Firmware Updating 501090 Rev  F    TLS Expansions    DANGER    TO AVOID THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY     TURN OFF ALL POWER TO THE TAPE LIBRARY SYSTEM  THEN REMOVE THE  POWER CORD  BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY OF THE PROCEDURES IN THIS    CHAPTER     NEVER OPERATE THE LIBRARY WHILE THE CABINET DOOR IS OPEN  OR WITH  THE TOP PANEL OR SIDE PANELS REMOVED     GEFAHR  UM VERIETZUNGEN ZU VERHINDEM     SCHALTEN SIE ALLE STROMSCHALTER AN DER TLS AUS UND ENTFERNEN SIE    DAS STROMKABEL  BEVOR SIE MIT DER SERVICE ARBEIT BEGINNEN     BENUTZEN SIE DIE TLS NIE WENN DIE TUERE OFFEN IST  ODER DIE DECK    BZW  SEITENPLATTE ENTFERNT SIND           9 1 Introduction    501090 Rev  F    This chapter contains installation instructions for each TLS expansion kit  To replace  an existing FRU  Field Replaceable Unit   follow the instructions in Chapter 7     A number of expansion kits are available from Qualstar  Some expansion kits are  used to increase the cartridge capacity of some TLS models  while other expansion  kits are used to add a Barco
189. nting Screws  4  eee    Motor Cable       Figure 7 73 Carousel Motor in Dual Bay TLS    7 96 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Blower Power Supply                      Handler Handler  Power Supply    Power Supply  Left Side T r  Right Side  A Mounting                S  0   yes g crews  3  bi  Upper Carousel   Ai See  Pivot Support Mounting  A  Ri ra as ao  Left Side Screws  3   lt  Ig Oe  Figure 7 74 Dual Bay TLS Top View  CAUTION    Be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor with the Carousel Gear    Guard when you remove the Carousel  Figure 7 67            Sj   Pi  ppa Carousel Bearing     T ail Upper Carousel Pivot Support    e             Upper Carousel Bearing  Top View    Upper Carousel Pivot                   Carousel Gear Guard Se    ParousalGBar F JE     Lower Carousel Pivot  l        gg  Mounting seer T Midplate    Screws  4                                Carousel Motor Shaft Gear  Motor Cable    Figure 7 75 Dual Bay Carousel Assembly    501090 Rev  F Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 97    7 19 4 Dual Bay Carousel Motor Replacement    7 98     58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Libraries     1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Align the mounting holes in the Carousel Motor with the corresponding mount   ing holes in the TLS    Midplate  The motor   s cable will face the left side of the  TLS when properly oriented  Figure 7 75      NOTE    A small flashlight  small mirror and ball point Allen wrenches may be useful when instal
190. ocedure in Section 7 10 1 to remove the I O port assembly     For 54xx  64xx and 84xx model libraries  remove all of the Magazine Anchors  38  or 6  model dependent   For each Magazine Anchor being removed  use a number  2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the two Receiver Mounting Screws and then  remove the Magazine Anchor  To keep the receiver in alignment replace the two  Receiver Mounting Screws into the Receiver Mounting Screw holes and tighten  with a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  See Figure 7 68     Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove all three mounting screws from  the Upper Carousel Pivot Support  Figure 7 69   then lift the Upper Carousel  Pivot Support up out of the TLS  Figure 7 70            Handler  Power Supply                a   Upper Carousel pne e ee Screws  3     Pivot Support e  gt     Figure 7 69 Single Bay TLS Top View     62xx Shown    CAUTION    Be careful not to damage the Carousel Position Sensor with the Carousel Gear    Guard when you remove the Carousel  Figure 7 67         501090 Rev  F    a  For TLS series 62xx and 82xx  lift the Carousel up until the Lower Carousel  Bearing clears the Midplate  then move the Carousel about four inches forward   then about one inch toward the left side of the cabinet  to gain access to the Car   ousel Motor   s mounting screws  Figure 7 70      b  For TLS series 54xx  64xx and 84xx  lift the Carousel up until the Lower Car   ousel Bearing clears the Midplate  then move the Carousel about three inches  t
191. ocking a Y   Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  optical path   Possibly a cartridge lying in the bottom of the library     6  A Y   Clear Sensor s  Inventory Sentry Beam s  detector or emitter is dirty or ob   scured     7  The unit is configured for no I O port  but one is installed and it is not positioned  all the way against the back stop     8  The unit requires calibration  due to a component or FRU change     Troubleshooting 6 9    6 2    6 2 1    6 2 2    6 2 3    6 10    Operation Failures    The problems in this section occur during normal operation     During operation  a key on the key pad works intermittently  or  completely fails to operate     Possible cause     A switch on the Control Panel PCBA has failed  It is possible to pry the cap off the  switch and clean the contacts  If you try this  pry the cap off using a thin knife blade  and be careful not to lose the    X    shaped contact spring inside  Clean the contact  spring and the two contacts inside the switch by wiping with a plastic safe contact  cleaner or with isopropyl alcohol  If this fails  replace the entire front panel FRU     The library tries to insert a tape into a tape drive that is already  occupied     When the library attempts to put a tape into an occupied drive  it is not a failure  For  example  if the library takes an inventory after a tape is inserted into a drive  then  the library does not know if a tape is in the drive  If commanded to do so  the library  will attempt to put 
192. of the display   The display automatically scrolls when necessary  The pointer identifies the cur   rent selection  as shown in Section 3 1 3 below     e Ifa value is highlighted  the A  UP  and V  DOWN  keys change the value of the  highlighted character or word  The DOWN key changes the character to the preced   ing character in the sequence  i e   from B to A  or from 2 to 1   Pressing the A  UP   key has the opposite effect     The Menu System 3 1    e Ifa multiple choice value is highlighted  the A  UP  and VW  DOWN  keys cycle  through the available choices     e Ifthe A  UP  or V  DOWN  key is pressed and held down  the control key s action  repeats at a rapid rate     3 1 3 The ENTER Control Key    The ENTER key behaves as follows     e Ifthe item pointer is pointing at a sub menu  indicated by a leading bullet   press   ing ENTER will display the selected sub menu        OveeeeRlement Status  7 Display   Find Label    INITIALIZE       Skip Labels  NO  INVALIDATE  ET DRIVE EMPTY                            e Ifthe item pointer points to a command such as POSITION  commands are always  displayed in all upper case letters   pressing ENTER executes the command   O    Position Handler    To Location 111111  POSITION       e When a command is executed  only the top line of the menu and the command  name  centered on the third line  are displayed for the duration of the command   s  execution     O   ePosition Handler    POSITION       e Ifa value contains an editable field 
193. og  Display  Display Left  Display Right  BDC   Clean   Configuration   DriveBay   Executive   FC Events   FC Replies   FC States   I2c   Inventory   Ioport   RBT Actions   RBT Client   RBT Events   RBT I O Port   RBT Machines   RBT Operations   RBT States   SCSI Commands   SCSI Interrupt   SCSI Phases   SCSI States   Sequential   CLEAR  LOCK  UNLOCK                         The TLS has a built in logging facility that can keep track of various system activities   The settings made in the Configuration Advanced Log menu determine which TLS  activities are logged   See the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Man   ual  Qualstar document number 501450   The Display Log menu determines which of  the logged items are to be displayed  If an item is set ON  any of its logged data will be  displayed  If an item is set OFF  it will not be displayed  The logging facility is nor   mally used to analyze complex SCSI interface or Handler operation problems     The logging system is most effectively used by a field service person who is working  under the direction of a Qualstar Technical Support technician  First  the field service  person reports a problem s symptom s  to a Qualstar Technical Support technician   then the technician directs the field service person to look only at problem   specific  logged data  Finally  the logged data is evaluated to help determine the cause of the  problem     The TLS logs so much data about its internal workings that the data can overwhelm
194. om of the TLS     7  Usea 1 8 inch Allen wrench to loosen the upper Leadscrew retaining screw                 m Carriage Cable Clamp  Mounting Screws                                                              Figure 7 6 The Carriage Assembly     Top View             amp  gt   pene oo Leadscrew bal  eo Retaining  Screw  a Cabinet Foot a  wy wy                Figure 7 7 Single Bay TLS Cabinet     Bottom View    Steps 8 and 9 apply to single bay libraries only     8  Lay the TLS on its left side  as seen from the front  to gain access to the bottom  Leadscrew retaining screw  Figure 7 7      9  Use a 1 8 inch Allen wrench to remove the Leadscrew retaining screw   Figure 7 7   then stand the TLS upright on its feet  Proceed to step 11     Steps 10 and 11 apply to dual bay libraries only     10  Using a small mirror and a small flashlight if needed  locate the bottom Lead   screw retaining screw  corresponding to the carriage you wish to remove  on the  bottom of the TLS  Figure 7 8      501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 11    11  Usea 1 8 inch L shaped Allen wrench to remove the Leadscrew retaining screw   Figure 7 8      Casters  6       KA Re  Viewed from above  Leadscrew Retaining Screw  for right side Carriage Assembly          D  e   PR       Leadscrew Retaining Screw  for left side Carriage Assembly    Figure 7 8 Dual Bay TLS Cabinet     Bottom View    NOTE    The Teflon  coating on the Leadscrew is easily scratched  Please handle the Leadscrew with care  T
195. om the Top    Figure 7 50 Bracket Screws    Tape Drive Power  Supply Opening    Drive Bay PCBA       Figure 7 51 Cables Right Side of TLS    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 73    9  Carefully move the cables that are behind the Drive Bay PCBA around to the  front of the PCBA  Figure 7 51      NOTE    In the next step  the washers and nuts on the PCBA Mounting studs may drop into the cabinet    when they are being removed        10  Reach through the four access holes in the rear of the TLS with a 1 4 inch nut   driver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  to remove the PCBA mounting nuts   Figure 7 49   Access the remaining two PCBA mounting nuts from the drive bay  openings and remove them     11  Carefully lift the Drive Bay PCBA off the PCBA Mounting Studs and out of the  TLS     12  Retrieve any washers or nuts that may have fallen into the cabinet     7 17 4 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 62xx and 82xx Models    1  Before replacing the Drive Bay PCBA  determine that the board has the proper  jumper and IC  integrated circuit  configuration  Jumpers must be installed on  the board at the SCL and SDA connectors and the IC component must be in   stalled at location U1  See Figure 7 52     Top of Drive Bay PCBA                   E IC Installed    I  Jumpers Installed                                              Figure 7 52 62xx and 82xx Model Drive Bay PCBA Jumper and IC Configuration    2  Insert the Drive Bay PCBA into the TLS and align its mounting screw holes wi
196. ort up out of the TLS  Figure 7 75      14  Lift the Carousel up until the Lower Carousel Bearing clears the Midplate  then  move the Carousel about three inches forward  then about two inches toward the  right side of the cabinet  Figure 7 75   This will allow the Carousel Motor Shaft  Gear to be moved freely     NOTE    A small flashlight  small mirror and ball point Allen wrenches may be useful when removing the    Carousel Motor mounting screws        15  Working from the front and rear of the TLS use a 7 64    Allen wrench to remove  all four Carousel Motor mounting screws  Figure 7 75   Note that a combination  of short and long arm 7 64    Allen wrenches may be needed to access the various  mounting screw locations     16  Remove the Carousel Motor from the cabinet     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 95    Magazine Anchor lee   Top view of Carousel with 6   Light Blue Color  aa  a Receivers mounted                         Remove 3 Consecutive 6 32 x 1 2 Receiver                               Pairs of Magazine Anchors Mounting Screws  2   ree A e ED Da aaa  m     gt  o 6 32 x 1 2 Receiver  O E M i 2  Magazine Anchor n N ounting Screws  2    Light Blue Color   et ee    Front view of Receiver Side view of Receiver    Figure 7 72 Magazine Anchors Shown on 58xxx 68xxx 88xxx Models    Carousel Motor Shaft Gear Side View    i a Motor Cable Connector     ___              Carousel PCBA                Hole in Midplate                                          Mou
197. ory of Operation    2 3 1 Handler    Figure 2 9 shows the major components of a TLS 5000 6000 8000 cartridge Handler   The components of the left and right Handlers are identical     Cartridge     lt  lt         Presence    Sensor l i  f                                        p Barcode  Ape SS Reader  Assembly  gt   Vertical  mS Z Axis Motor  Insertion          Z Axis Motor    Top View    Bottom View    Figure 2 9 Handler     Top and Bottom Views    2 3 2 I O Port Assembly  Figure 2 10 shows the major components of the I O port assembly     I O Port Motor I O Port Slot          Note  The LED   s Cable Plu  I O Port Lead Screw g    is located under the   O Port PCBA           Motor Cable Plug       O Port Door                               I O Port Cable Plug    I O Port PCBA  8 PCBA  O Port PC    Mounting Nuts    Bottom View    Figure 2 10 1 O Port Assembly    Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    2 3 3 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs     Many of the library s major components are available separately as Field Replaceable  Units  FRUs   These components can be removed and replaced in the field by qualified  personnel  See Chapter 7 for a complete list of FRUs  their part numbers and re   moval replacement instructions     Some FRUs can be added to a unit as an expansion item  The instructions for install   ing an expansion FRU for the first time  or for permanently removing an expansion  FRU are contained in Chapter 9     501090 Rev  F Description and Theory of O
198. ounting Screws    7  Remove any cable ties and or cable wraps to expose six to eight inches of the red  and black  24 AWG wires attached to the Fan Assembly     8  Carefully cut the red and black wires six to eight inches away from the Fan As   sembly  Figure 7 18  and then remove the Fan Assembly from the TLS     7 26 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Fan Assembly  Red and Black 24 AWG Wires         Wire Cutters       Cut the wires 6 to 8 inches  from the Fan Assembly     Figure 7 18 Cutting the wires on the defective fan    7 8 3 Fan Assembly Replacement for 6110  62xx  8111 and 82xx Models    1  Measure the length of the red and black wires that are attached to the Fan As   sembly that was removed in Section 7 8 2     2  Adda minimum of one inch to the length measured in Step 1  This is the length  that the red and black wires will be cut to on the replacement Fan Assembly     3  Carefully cut the red and black wires on the replacement Fan Assembly to the  length determined in Step 2  Length of old Fan Assemblies wires   a minimum  of one inch      4  Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the end of the red wire     5  Fully insert the end of the red wire into a Butt Splice  Panduit Part Number  BSN22 C or equivalent  and use a wire crimper to securely attach the Butt  Splice to the wire  See Figure 7 19     6  Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the black wire     7  Using a wire striper  remove 1 4  of the insulation from the ends of the red and  bl
199. oward the right side of the cabinet  to gain access to the Carousel Motor   s  mounting screws  Figure 7 70      Disconnect the Carousel Motor cable from the Carousel PCBA  Figure 7 67      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 91    10  For TLS models 62xx and 82xx  remove the motor cable   s nylon cable tie that is  attached to the Midplate  Figure 7 71      11  For TLS models 54xx  64xx and 84xx  from below pull the motor cable through  the hole in the Midplate     NOTE    For TLS models 62xx and 82xx  the Carousel Motor is mounted in the right side of the cabinet  as    seen from the front   For 54xx  64xx and 84xx models  the Carousel Motor is mounted in the left  side of the cabinet        12  Use a 3 32 inch Allen wrench to remove all four Carousel Motor mounting screws   Figure 7 70      13  Remove the Carousel Motor from the cabinet                                                                 Upper Carousel Bearing     T e Upper Carousel Pivot Support  M    Upper Carousel Bearing  Top View  Upper Carousel Pivot  Front of TLS       Carousel Gear Guard Ee            Carousel Gear T ma     Lower Carousel Pivot  wee   re YY  LE ay  Mounting ol Midplate  4  ee  Carousel Motor Shaft Gear  Motor Cable    Figure 7 70 Single Bay Carousel Assembly    7 92 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Carousel Motor    Figure 7 71    Midplate    Carousel Motor    ee Cable Connector    Nylon Cable Tie  REAR VIEW Attached to Midplate                      Carousel Motor Nylon 
200. ower and remove the power cord     Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners on  the access cover on the right side as seen from the rear  Figure 7 59   Carefully  remove the access cover     Remove tape drive assemblies  if installed in the left side drive bays of the TLS   Remove the Blower Assembly  Section 7 9 2      Disconnect all cables from the Drive Bay PCBA being removed  Figure 7 65      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    6  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the three Drive Bay PCBA  Bracket screws for the PCBA being removed  See Figure 7 66  Save the screws  for later use     7  Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through the front opening of the TLS     8  Use a 1 4 inch nutdriver to remove the six PCBA mounting nuts and washers   then lift the PCBA off the mounting studs of the Bracket  Figure 7 62   Note that  the spacers behind the PCBA come loose when the PCBA is removed     Cable Connectors       Drive Bay PCBA  Bracket Screws    Drive Bay PCBA  Brackets       Figure 7 66 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Models Left Side Drive Bay PCBA Brackets and Screws    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 85    7 17 7 4 Left Side Drive Bay PCBA Replacement    1  Before replacing the Drive Bay PCBA  determine that the board has the proper  jumper and IC  integrated circuit  configuration  For the Upper Bay Board  P N  501257 03 4  a jumper must be installed on the board at the SDA connector and  ajump
201. p and water     4  Lift the Carriage Assembly up to the top of the Vertical  Y  Axis range of motion   then push it back down to the bottom stop  Repeat this process five more times     5  Ifthe Carriage Assembly has been removed or replaced  recalibrate the unit   Section 5 3 2      7 6 Carriage PCBA    P N 501147 01 1  Tools and Material Required   e Number 1 Phillips Screwdriver  e Piece of Twine    The Carriage Assembly must be removed before replacing the Carriage PCBA     Hole for Vertical  Y  Axis    Home Sensor Probe Barcode Reader          PCBA Mounting  Screws  4           CPOPTO    AN                                        Cable  aa Barcode Reader  une SME  Jo Barcode Reader  MOTORY 2 Mounting Plate  GRIPB                                  Figure 7 14 Carriage PCBA  Single Bay Handler Bottom View     7 6 1 Carriage PCBA Removal    Refer to Figure 7 14   1  Remove the Carriage Assembly  see Section 7 5 1 for details      2  Ifthe Carriage Assembly is equipped with a Barcode Reader  unplug the cable at  the BCR connector on the Carriage PCBA     3  Remove all three Barcode Reader mounting plate screws using a number 1 Phil   lips screwdriver     4  Remove the Barcode Reader Mounting Plate   It is not necessary to remove the  Barcode Reader before removing the Barcode Reader Mounting Plate      5  Unplug the motor cables from the MOTORY and MOTORZ connectors     7 20 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    6   Untie or cut the piece of twine that is holding t
202. pace for the data classes that the user wishes to log  Refer to the Configuration Advanced Log  section in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar document  number 501450  for details     NOTE       501090 Rev  F    Maintenance Menu    The user can also use the Display Log Entry menu to turn the data display class  masks on or off  as the user can do with the Display Log menu  The difference here  is that logging activity is suspended when the user enters the Display Status  screen  and remains suspended while the Display Log Entry menu is displayed   Logging activity is reactivated when the user returns to the Maintenance  Display  Log menu     2  Press the EXIT key twice to return to the Maintenance Display Log menu     4 4 Maintenance Display Prevents Status Screen    M       Display Prevents  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator  Initiator    OON cna WNO    PRPRPRPPR  mwWNRO       Be EY Beet bt et a  ODI HAUBWNHROW       4 6 Maintenance Menu 501090 Rev  F    4 5 Maintenance D
203. par   tial download  Do not turn off TLS power while the update is in progress  If the entire  firmware object file is successfully downloaded  the TLS will reprogram itself and  then restart automatically        Once the library restarts  the user will see the Qualstar Remote Library Control Panel     8 4 6 1   Example of a download session    Enter the command    xd     The application will respond    Receiving RLS Firm   ware     to indicate it is waiting for the user   s xmodem data     501090 Rev  F Firmware Updating 8 11    E TLS Remote Front Panel   HyperT erminal  Iof x   File Edit View Call Transfer Help    Dle 22  2al       Qualstar Remote Library Commands    Command Help  Exit to Front Panel  Lock log    og   Reset TLS   Unlock log   modem firmware down load     gt  dl     Receiving TLS Firmware               oo   Connected 2 30 10 VT100  9600 8 N 1  SCROLL  CAPS  NUM  Capture A    Figure 8 13 Example of Xmodem Firmware Download    Use the HyperTerminal menu function Transfer  gt Send File  to download the  TLS firmware file to the library  TLS firmware object files are typically named  700105 211 where 700105 represents the code set name and 211 is the Version  Ver   sion 2 11 in this example   A revision letter may follow the code set name     NOTE    It is very important not to power off the TLS Library while reprogramming is in progress  Power   ing off the TLS Library is not necessary and can cause the TLS Library to lose its program con   tents               
204. password  Update  to prevent unauthorized access to the Private    menu     5  Edit the LabelCheckChar value in the Configuration Advanced   Changer menu     6  Test the Barcode Reader     9 3 1 Required Parts and Tools    e One Barcode Reader Kit   Qualstar P N 500983 04 4 for TLS 6000 and 68xxx Models  Qualstar P N 500983 05 1 for TLS 5000  58xxx  8000 and 88xxx Models    e One Number 1 Phillips Screwdriver    e One TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar  Document number 501450     NOTE    A barcode reader expansion kit contains a Barcode Reader  with attached Mounting Plate and    cable  and three 4 40 x 1 4 inch pan head screws        9 12 TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    9 3 2 Barcode Reader Installation    Follow the instructions in this Section to add a barcode reader to a TLS that currently    does not have one  first time installation   The Barcode Reader mounts on the under     side of the Carriage Assembly  Figure 9 10      NOTE    It is not necessary to remove the Carriage Assembly from the TLS before installing a Barcode  Reader     Do not remove the bracket from the Barcode Reader  If the bracket is removed  it will not be    obvious how to replace it properly     Barcode Reader  Mounting Plate Barcode Reader    a                                                             BCR  Gs Connector    Barcode Reader   Handler Bottom View                 Figure 9 10 Barcode Reader    501090 Rev  F TLS Expansions    Barcode Reader  Mounting Plate  S
205. peration 2 15    The Menu System    The Menu system allows the user to perform routine operations  It also allows a quali   fied individual to make configuration changes to the TLS and to perform diagnostics   This chapter explains the Menu system  the types of information it presents  and how  to use it  Specific information about Configuration or Operation menu items can be  found in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar docu   ment number 501450      3 1 Using the Menu Control Keys    The control keys make it possible to point to a particular item and change or edit its  value  or to execute a command  The function of each control key is dependent upon  the location within the menu structure  The control keys are shown in Figure 3 1                     I O Port   a Display    SaO       Control Keys    nana    v   ENER  meny                 Y    Figure 3 1 TLS Control Keys    3 1 1 The MENU Control Key    Press the MENU key to enable the menu system  The menu system can be used with   out interrupting ongoing changer operations  If the Top Menu is not displayed  press   ing the MENU key at any time always returns control to the Top Menu  Figure 3 4   If  the Top Menu is displayed  press the MENU key to return to the Operating Display     3 1 2 The A  UP  and V  DOWN  Control Keys    501090 Rev  F    e While navigating through the menu system  the A  UP  and VW  DOWN  keys move  the item pointer  right pointing arrow  up and down the left column 
206. r                                           U   6 32 x 3 8 Receiver Mounting Screws  with Integral Locking Washers  2   E   oe  e lt   o E   xaP         Q ie   O ie   O O  O Q  O O  Q O  O  2  O O  O O  7 5 6 32 x 1 2 Receiver  Q 9 Mounting Screws  2   O O  i Q     Magazine Anchor o      Light Blue Color  Te o  L I                                           Front view of Receiver Side view of Receiver    Figure 9 8 Receiver Assemblies    9 8 TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    9 2 1 3 Model 58132 to 58264  68120 to 68240 or 88132 to 88264 Expansions    This procedure adds one Receiver Assembly to each of the three empty carousel faces  on each carousel  6 Receiver Assemblies total      Refer to Figure 9 9          Top view of Carousel with  3 Receivers mounted                6 32 x 3 8 Receiver Mounting Screws  with Integral Locking Washers  2           o e                                                                             o mm oS     oe   fe   o    o O   o te    o O   ie  Oo   O ie    O O   O O 6 32 x 1 2 Receiver  5 5 Mounting Screws  2   O is    ie  fo    O O   o ie    ie  O   O o   o Gmm             O o   o ie    O o   o  9     o  o   o fe    O ie     Magazine Anchor  2    Light Blue Color     O 6 32 x 1 2 Receiver  Mounting Screws  2                                               O o  O  9   lej  0   O o  Oo ie    6      o o  Front view of Receiver Side view of Receiver    Figure 9 9 Receiver Assemblies    501090 Rev  F TLS Expansions    9 2 2    9 10    1  Turn off t
207. r until  after a legitimate pass     word is entered     11     12     eeeeeeee Maintenance     Display Log     Display Prevents   Display Revision   Display Stats        Display Voltage    Test Inventory  Test Keyboard     7 Test LC Display          Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Test LC Display     Press the ENTER key to enter the  Maintenance Test LC Display menu     Press and release the V  DOWN  key once     This step must be executed quickly  within 1 5 seconds   Sequentially press and  hold down the VW  DOWN   ENTER and MENU control keys  in the order shown   Do not press all three control keys at the same time      Simultaneously release the three control keys  If the Top Menu reappears at  this point  repeat steps 3 8 above to display the Private menu     The Private menu should now be displayed     eee eeceeeeeeeePrivate  9Access  77777277        Blower   eCalibration  eCalibration Left  eCalibration Right  CALIBRATE  Carousel  Configuration  Display A D  Display Locations  Display Positions  Display Sensors  DriveBay  Executive   ESET SCSI BUS                      If necessary  use the A  UP  or V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Access     Press the ENTER key to begin editing the Access value  entering a password    A flashing cursor should appear at the first character s position     NOTE    If a MASTER SECURITY message appears  instead of a flashing cursor in step 11 above  follow the    instructions in Section 5 2 3 to disable the Master Security 
208. range rubber bushing on the bottom plate     6  Insert the bottom end of the second or final  model dependent  Guide Shaft  the  end without the white spacer  into the rear Guide Shaft hole in the top plate   then gently lower the rear Guide Shaft down through the hole  This is best ac   complished by resting the hand holding the shaft on the top plate  and then guid   ing the shaft from inside the TLS with the other hand     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 15    7  Lower the Rear Guide Shaft down through the Rear Guide Shaft bearing in the  Carriage Assembly  Figure 7 4 or Figure 7 5  and into the hole in the bottom  plate     8  For dual bay models only  insert the bottom end of the last Guide Shaft  the end  without the white spacer  into the supporting Guide Shaft hole in the top plate   then gently lower the supporting Guide Shaft down through the hole  This is  best accomplished by resting the hand holding the shaft on the top plate  and  then guiding the shaft from inside the TLS with the other hand     CAUTION    To prevent scratching the Leadscrew   s delicate Teflon   coating  carefully follow    the instructions below        9  To install the Leadscrew Spring Cup subassembly  lift the Carriage Assembly all  the way up to the top of the Vertical  Y  Axis range of motion and hold it there     10  Insert the bottom end of the Leadscrew  Figure 7 12  into its hole in the top  plate  then lower the Leadscrew down into the threaded hole in the Vertical  Y   Axis Leads
209. rating properly     e Up To Speed  YES NO   This value shows whether or not the blower is operating at it   s proper speed  When  the library is turned on and after tape drives have been added or removed there    The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    will be a few seconds delay for the blower speed to adjust  At these times the Up To  Speed value will be NO     e Speed  This value represents the blowers current rotational speed     e Volts 24  This value is the current amount of volts that the blower is using from the blower  power supply     5 4 5 The Private Calibration Data Status Screens    P  Calibration Left  Calibrated  YES  Valid  YES  CRTPRS Thrs ddddd  YCLEAR hrs ddddd    Private  Calibration  Calibrated  YES  Valid  YES  CRTPRS Thrs ddddd  I OCLR Thrs ddddd  I OFULL Thrs ddddd    P  Calibration Right  Calibrated  YES             Valid  YES  CRTPRS hrs ddddd  I OCLR Thrs ddddd  I OFULL Thrs ddddd                   YCLEAR hrs ddddd             YCLEAR hrs ddddd    YCLEAR hrs ddddd                                                                                        Y D 0   ddddd  YCLEAR hrs ddddd YD E Ofst0  tddd YCLEAR hrs ddddd  Y DATA 0   ddddd YD E Ofst1 tddd Y DATA 0   ddddd  Y DRIVE Ofst0 tddd 2 pee Oreo daa Y DRIVE Ofst0 tddd  Y DRIVE Ofst1 tddd ouge ive Opet as idda Y DRIVE Ofst1 tddd  Y DRIVE Ofst2  ddd S castep einai Y DRIVE Ofst2 tddd  Y DRIVE Ofst3 tddd ees Tddd  d Y DRIVE Ofst3  ddd  Y FIXED d Jes iadddaa Y FIXED 0   ddddd  Y FIXED dd F dda Y FIXED 1   ddddd
210. rcode Reader Mounting Plate with the mounting screw  holes in the Carriage Assembly  Then install all three Barcode Reader Mounting  Plate mounting screws  Use a number 1 Phillips screwdriver to securely tighten  the screws     8  Ifthe carriage is equipped with a Barcode Reader  plug the BCR cable into the  BCR connector on the Carriage PCBA     9  Replace the Carriage Assembly  then recalibrate the TLS  See Section 7 5 2 for  details      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 21    7 7 Barcode Reader    TLS 5000 and 58xxx  SAIT  P N 500983 05 1  TLS 6000 and 68xxx  DLT  P N 500983 04 4  TLS 8000 and 88xxx  LTO  P N 500983 05 1    A single barcode reader is standard on models 54xx  64xx and 84xx  Two barcode  readers are standard on 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx models  For all other models barcode  readers are optional  The instructions in this section assume that a barcode reader ex   ists in the unit  and that it will be removed and then replaced     If you are installing a new barcode reader for the first time  or permanently removing  the currently installed barcode reader  follow the instructions in Chapter 9  Section 9 3     Tools Required     e Number 1 Phillips Screwdriver    e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    NOTE    It is not necessary to remove the Carriage Assembly from the TLS for Barcode Reader installation    or removal        Barcode Reader    Mounting Plate Barcode Reader    Barcode Reader  Mounting Plate Screws  3        R      Barcode Reader                        
211. rop of Loctite 242 to the threads on the Leadscrew retaining screw  a  10 32 x 3 8 inch Button Head Socket Cap screw   then insert the screw through  the bottom plate and into the threaded end of the Leadscrew  Firmly tighten the  screw with a 1 8 inch L shaped Allen wrench     NOTE    If you do not apply Loctite 242 to the leadscrew retaining screw before reinstalling it  the lead   screw may vibrate loose during operation     Though the Leadscrew may rotate slightly while you tighten the retaining screw  It should be   come firmly locked to the bottom plate when the retaining screw is fully tightened        NOTE    Make sure that the white spacer on the top end of each Guide Shaft is visible  If one of the    white spacers is not visible  the corresponding Guide Shaft may be upside down        18     19     20     21     501090 Rev  F    Place a Guide Shaft strike plate over each of the Guide Shaft holes on the top  plate  Figure 7 10      On all single bay models and when replacing the right side Carriage Assembly  on dual bay models  gently move the Switch Bracket ribbon cable out of the way   Insert all necessary Guide Shaft Strike Plate mounting screws  6 32 x 3 8 pan  head screws with integral lockwashers  into the Guide Shaft Strike Plate mount   ing holes  Figure 7 10   Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the  screws     If the Spring Cup was not removed from the Leadscrew during disassembly  go       to step 27  If the Spring Cup was removed from t
212. rst letter is capitalized     Update is the password used by qualified service personnel to access  other  Private menu items while upgrading a TLS  adding or removing a  Barcode Reader  or replacing the Executive PCBA  Please note that only  the first letter is capitalized     The current password should always be cleared  removed  after the user finishes ser   vicing a unit to prevent unauthorized access to the  Private menu  Clearing a    password will also remove the  Private sub menu from the top menu     5 3 2 Setting a Password    Once set  a password remains set  even if the power is removed from the TLS   until it    is intentionally cleared  removed  by executing the Private menu   s    CL          EAR ACCESS command     Three things happen when a user sets a password     Private appears at the bottom of the Top Menu   Access  shown in step 9 below  disappears from the Private menu     CLEAR ACCESS  shown in Section 5 3 3  appears in the Private menu     Top Menu    Configuration    Maintenance     Operation    Private       NOTE    Passwords are case sensitive  Be sure to use the correct capital and lower case letters while set   ting passwords        501090 Rev  F    Turn the power on     Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu     Top Menu  eConfiguration     gt  Maintenance   Operation       Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Maintenance     Press the ENTER key to enter the Maintenance menu     The Private Menu 5 5    5 6    10     These do not appea
213. rtridge  present or the format of the currently loaded cartridge has been determined     e Needs Cleaning  YES NO   When the Needs Cleaning value is YES  the LTO tape drive needs to have it   s tape  heads cleaned using a cleaning cartridge     e No ID  YES NO   When the No ID value is YES  the DLT tape drive does not have a valid SCSI ID set  for it  A SCSI ID must be set before in the tape drive before it is able to communi   cate on the SCSI bus     e Ready  YES NO   When the Ready value is YES  the IBM LTO tape drive is ready to operate     e States  YES IDLE   When the States value is YES  the DLT tape cartridge is currently in motion in the  tape drive  When the value is IDLE  there is no tape motion with the loaded car   tridge     e Temp Problem  The Temp Problem value will display a message if the tape drive is operating out of  it   s normal temperature range  The messages indicate at what point the tempera   ture problem is occurring in the drives operation  The following messages may be  displayed  CALIBRATING  CLEANING  CODE UPDATE  ERASING  LOADING   RDY CODE  READING  REWINDING  SEEKING  UNLOADING or WRITING     e Unloaded  YES NO   When the Unloaded value is YES  the tape drive currently does not have a tape car   tridge loaded     e Volt Problem  YES NO   When the Volt Problem value is YES  the tape drive is not having it   s normal volt   age range being supplied to it     5 26 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    5 4 14 4 The Private DriveBay Bay Menu    Priva
214. ry to move the Drive Bay PCBA Bracket to prop   erly align the connectors  Refer to Chapter 5 in the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installa   tion and Operation Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more infor   mation on tape drive assembly installation     8  Confirm that the Tape Drive Connector   s on both tape drive assemblies are fully  inserted into the mating connectors on the on the Drive Bay PCBA     9  Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the three Drive Bay PCBA  Bracket screws  Figure 7 66      10  Reconnect all cables to the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 65      7 86 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 18 Carousel PCBA    P N 50061 7 02 2  This section applies only to libraries with carousels  Single bay libraries will contain a  single carousel and TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain two iden   tical carousels referred to as the left and right carousels when viewed from the front  of the TLS     The replacement procedure that follows will apply to replacing the Carousel PCBA from  either single or dual bay models  making note of specific operations when required   NOTICE    There are two versions of the Carousel Printed Circuit Board Assembly   PCBA 500617 01 4 and PCBA 500617 02 2  The  01 version uses a 20 pin     vertical CAROSL  Carousel  connector  while the  02 version uses a 20 pin   right angle CAROSL connector  The 5000 6000 8000 models require the  02  version with the right angle CAROSL connector        Tools Require
215. s   P  Display Positions   P    Display Sensors Private      DriveBay  Location  111111  Left  Left    TL  Accessible  FALSE IS  dddda  Adapt  0  T2  Access  Valid  FALSE x   ddddd ISHome  0  T3  Barcodeable  FALSE Y   ddddd Locked  0  T4  Label             Period Y   ddddd lOpen  0  LT1  Label Error  FALSE Z  dddda  ScsiDF  0  LT2  Label Valid  FALSE Period Z    ddddd  Shunt1  0  LT3  Occupied  FALSE  Shunt2  0  LT4  Occup  Valid  FALSE XIndex  0    RTL  On My Side  FALSE     PDP              YHome  0  RT2  Present  FALSE ZHome  0  RT3  Pres  Valid  FALSE    RTA  Source Valid FALSE  Bay  Source Loc   111111  Bay Left  Synchronized FALSE   O  PS  Bay Right  Type  DRIVE  EEPROM  Tape Ejected FALSE 8  EEPROM Left  Locked  o  EEPROM Right   Open  0   ScsiDF  o   Shunt1  0   shant2   0 Private DriveBay 2 T    Private DriveBay Bay   P DriveBay     EEPROM  xIndex  0 Address  xx P DriveBay  Bay Left   pp        EEPROM  Left  Taosa  7 Type  2222222 Address  xx XXi XX XX XX XX  ZHome  0  Revision  ddd Type  xx XXi XX XX XX XX  Count Mode  OFF Revision  dad XXi XX XX Xx XX  Drive  NONE Count Mode  OFF   Information Temperature  ddd   Status 12V  dad             5V  ddd    Note that the bold menu items are model dependent   Libraries with single bays have a single SCSI ID sub menu  while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models                                          instead have SCSI ID LEFT and SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus  BD  etext  Taformation pen Eats   Compression  OFF iddd
216. s   sembly  Figure 7 18  and then remove the Fan Assembly from the TLS                    Front Opening                                                                   Figure 7 21 Fan Assembly Mounting Screws    7 8 4 2 Rear Fan  Refer to Figure 7 20     Upper Fan Assembly  e 4  Mounting Screws  2        Lower Fan Assembly  Mounting Screws  2     Upper Fan Assembly  Mounting Screws  2     Lower Fan Assembly  Mounting Screws  2        1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1   then remove the right Side Panel   Section 7 4 3   The openings in the right side of the TLS    frame give access to the  nuts on the back of the Fan Assembly s mounting screws                       VU       TNO    Figure 7 22 Access Cover on Rear of TLS    7 30 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs     Access Cover  Quarter turn  Fasteners  4        501090 Rev  F    3  Use a flat blade screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners and  carefully remove the access cover on the rear of the TLS  Figure 7 22      4  Usea flat blade screwdriver to turn the single quarter turn fastener at the top of  the Air Filter Clamp counter clockwise     5  Remove the Air Filter Clamp and air filter from the TLS     NOTE    In the next step  the nuts on the back of the mounting screws come loose when the screws are re     moved        6  Remove the two Fan Assembly mounting screws  Figure 7 28      Upper Fan Assembly  Mounting Screws  2     Rear Panel  of T
217. s and the IC component must be removed at location U1  See Figure  7 57     2  Align the Drive Bay PCBA mounting screw holes with the mounting studs of the                Bracket   Top of Drive Bay PCBA Top of Drive Bay PCBA    IC Installed l 1 Fae IC Removed  gece  C ie  cage   REAY KA Ta                                        Jumpers Installed   hE Jumpers Removed       DOOOOO  peacao  DOOOOO  peacac          m  o          R  54xx 64xx 84xx Upper Bay PCBA 54xx 64xx 84xx Lower Bay PCBA   P N 501257 01 8   P N 501257 02 6     Figure 7 57 54xx  64xx and 84xx Model Drive Bay PCBA Jumper and IC Configuration    7 78 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    3  Install a washer onto a mounting stud  then with a 1 4 inch nutdriver thread a  PCBA mounting nut onto the mounting stud  Install the remaining PCBA  Mounting screws the same way  Figure 7 56      4  Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through one of the openings in the  right side of the TLS    frame  Maneuver the tape drive connectors on the PCBA so  they are facing out the drive bay openings  Figure 7 58   Align the Brackets  three holes with the corresponding threaded holes in the TLS     NOTE    In the next step  only finger tighten the screws  The Bracket needs to be loosely held to the    frame of the TLS        5  Insert a Drive Bay Bracket screw through a hole in the bracket  Thread the  screw into the TLS finger tight  Install the remaining two Bracket screws the  same way     6  Install two tape drive
218. s cable is positioned in the center of the cutout in the  TLS    frame  Figure 7 28      5  Support the I O port assembly with one hand from inside the TLS  while install   ing all six mounting screws from above using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver   Figure 7 28      6  Plug the I O port ribbon cable into the IOPORT connector on the PCBA   Figure 2 10      7  Ifyou removed the Right side Panel  reinstall it  Section 7 4 4      8  Recalibrate the TLS   See Section 5 3 2 for details      7 11 1 O Port PCBA    TLS 5000 and 58xxx  SAIT  P N 501227 02 9  TLS 6000 and 68xxx  DLT  P N 501227 01 1  TLS 8000 and 88xxx  LTO  P N 501227 02 9    CAUTION    After the I O port PCBA is replaced in the I O port assembly  the unit must be re     calibrated after the I O port assembly is replaced in the TLS        The I O port assembly must be removed from the TLS before the I O port PCBA can  be replaced     Tools Required     e 1 4 inch Hex Nutdriver or Wrench    7 11 1 I O Port PCBA Removal    501090 Rev  F    1  Remove the I O port assembly from the TLS  Section 7 10 1      2  Gently turn the I O port leadscrew by hand  to move the I O port slot away from  the eight PCBA mounting nuts  Figure 7 30      3  Disconnect the MOTOR cable from the I O port PCBA   4  Turn the I O port assembly over and unplug the LEDs cable     5  Remove all eight PCBA mounting nuts using a 1 4 inch nutdriver  Figure 7 30      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 41    6  Lift the I O port PCBA out of the I O port 
219. s from the Drive Bay PCBA being removed  Figure 7 54      Through the access holes in the right side of the TLS use a number 2 Phillips  screwdriver to remove the three Drive Bay PCBA Bracket screws for the PCBA  being removed  Save the screws for later use  Figure 7 55      Remove any cable ties that are attached to the PCBA     Carefully guide the PCBA and its Bracket through one of the openings in the  right side of the TLS    frame     Use a 1 4 inch nutdriver to remove the six PCBA mounting nuts and washers   then lift the PCBA off the mounting studs of the Bracket  Figure 7 56      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Upper Drive Bay PCBA  P N 501257 01 8    Cable  Connections    Lower Drive Bay PCBA  P N 501257 02 6       Drive Bay PCBA  Brackets  Access Holes  6        Figure 7 55 Drive Bay PCBA Brackets and Access Holes   Right Side of TLS    501090 Rev  F Field    Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 77    Drive Bay PCBA  Mounting Nuts  6                          Figure 7 56 Drive Bay PCBA Mounting Nuts    7 17 6 Drive Bay PCBA Replacement 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models    1  Before replacing the Drive Bay PCBA  determine that the board has the proper  jumper and IC  integrated circuit  configuration  For the Upper Bay Board  P N  501257 01 8  jumpers must be installed on the board at the SCL and SDA con   nectors and the IC component must be installed at location U1  For the Lower  Bay Board  P N 501257 02 6  jumpers must not be present at the SCL and SDA  connector
220. s may contain leading zeros  Valid values are separately determined for  each item and are always within a contiguous range  All numeric values carry and  borrow to or from their more significant neighbors  There are three types of numeric  values found within the system     e Unsigned Decimal Values  Examples   23  07  123    The Menu System 501090 Rev  F    e Signed Decimal Values  These values are always indicated by the presence of a plus or minus sign  in front of the numeric value  The plus or minus signs are editable   Examples    07   7   123    e Hexadecimal Values  These values are always unsigned and consist of the digits 0 9  and upper  case letters A F  Leading zeros are always indicated   Examples   003F  FE10    3 3 2 2 Alpha Numeric Values    These values can contain up to 96 different characters including ten digits  0 9   upper  and lower case letters and special characters  such as spaces  dashes  etc  There is no  roll over between digits   See Table 3 4    Example    Qualstar TLS 88264    3 3 2 3 Multiple Choice Values    Each multiple choice value has its own list of valid choices  These values are not edit   able  The choices available may vary with different system configurations    Examples    YES  NO  BOTH  FRONT  HOST          NOTICE    The values displayed are always the actual values  If a displayed value is  changed in the display  it is immediately changed within the system  If it is    necessary to change back to an original value  the displaye
221. s on the SCSI bus     Barcodeable This value indicates whether or not the barcode reader can scan the barcode  label at the selected position  If the Barcodeable value is FALSE  the car   tridge must be moved to another location before its barcode label can be  scanned    Label Data This item is the barcode label data for the selected location  provided bar   code information is available    Label Error TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that an error occurred while reading the barcode  label for the selected location    Label Valid TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that the Label and Label Error data for the selected  location are valid     TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that the selected location is occupied by a cartridge   Occup  Valid TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value means the Occupied status for the selected location is valid   On My Side TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value means the selected location is on the right side of the library     Present TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value indicates that a drive  holder  or other device is present at the  selected location     Pres  Valid TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value means the Present status for the selected location is valid     Source Valid TRUE FALSE   A TRUE value means the Source Location data for the selected location is  valid    Source Loc  The Source value indicates the prior location of the cartridge that is currently  at the selected location  The Item value is an internal number  It is useful  only to a Qualstar Technical Support techn
222. s the remaining two PCBA Mounting Nuts from the drive bay openings and  tighten them     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 75    10     11     12     13     14     15     Carefully move the cables to the rear of the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 51   Align  the mounting holes in the cable holders with the cable holder mounting screw  holes  Figure 7 50      Insert a cable holder screw through both the TLS    frame and mounting hole in a  cable holder  Install a nut by hand or with long nose pliers onto the end the cable  holder screw  Tighten the screw using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  Reinstall  the remaining cable holder mounting screw the same way  Figure 7 50      Align the support bracket with its mounting holes on the rear of the TLS  Using  a number 2 Phillips screwdriver reinstall all three support bracket mounting  screws and tighten securely  Figure 7 50      Reconnect all the cables to the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 49    Replace the Tape Drive Power Supply  Section 7 15 2    Replace the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4      Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 17 5 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 54xx  64xx and 84xx Models    1     2     10     7 76    Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1     Remove the right Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section 7 4 8    Remove tape drive assemblies  if installed in the TLS    Remove one or both of the Tape Drive Power Supplies  Section 7 15 1    Disconnect all cable
223. scccceceeeessseceeececeesesssaeceeeeeeesenensaaees 5 3  5 38 Enabling the Private Menu         ccccccccccccecececececececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess 5 4  Dididic  ACCESS Lis  occ cece vous daze fies EE RE cots E O REE EE vos E E vate cade Re 5 4  5 3 2  Setting a Password  sunnier aiden tote a e sees Aa dek ee a e i hgeine eee 5 5  5 33     Clearing the Password iii Gi i sine aa kl dA nea a ee 5 7  OA  The Private Menus   i ccveatectet ead decehtts r a a a a E 5 8  5 4 1 Private CALIBRATE Command        ciceccceeccccssecsesseceseeecseeeeaaeceseeeeeseesenaecseaeeenaees 5 8  5 4 2 Private CLEAR ACCESS Command    00     c ceeccceesseceseeeeeeeceeaeceeaeecenaeeeeaecseaeeenaees 5 9  5 4 3 RESET SCSI BUS Command    cee ceccccccecessseceesceceeeeeeeaeceseaeeceeeeecsaeeeesuecneaeeenaees 5 9  5 4 4 The Private  Blower Menu seeroete tentos reesen EEE E NENEA E ENER Ee 5 10  5 4 5 The Private Calibration Data Status Screens         ssssssesssesssesssessserrsserssersserssees 5 11  5 4 6 The Private Carousel Menu     sssssssessssssssesseesseesseesseessreesseesseesseesstesstesseessesseeesseeso 5 12  5 4 7 The Private  Configuration Menu           ssssssesssesesssssesssressssssssseeosrsssseserereesssssseees 5 15  5 4 8 The Private Configuration  Defaults Menu             cccccccccccccceceesesssseceeeeeesenerseaees 5 15  5 4 9 The Private Configuration SCSI  Menu    cccccecssssececcceceseessseceeceseesesensaaees 5 16  5 4 10 The Private Display A D Status Screen       
224. screws     3  Reconnect the Power Cable and the 2   Wire Cable connectors to the Power Sup   ply PCBA     4  Place the Protective Screen on top of the Power Supply and install all four Pro   tective Screen mounting screws     5  Replace the right or left side Panel  Section 7 4 4      6  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 16 Executive PCBA                                                                Executive II P N 501137 01 2  Executive III P N 501387 01 3  Executive IV P N 501447 01 5  TLS Frame     p i Nut Lockwasher  wee Mounting Studs  4       Mounting Stud  __       PCBA  FRONT POWER  Spacer  PCBA NO  EAE     Location  Heat Sink Flange    T  caRAGE _L gt  Heat Sink Flange          ee SA1  Heat Sink Flange ele  Mounting Screws  4  fe SA2    SERIAL            CAROSL       WADAPT  i sles OPTO  2    bat a ee  DRVBAY E    SELYVD PWRDST    Hole for cable tie which attaches 12V  12V FANS wires to PCBA FANS                                                                                                             7 60 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Figure 7 42 Executive II and III PCBA   s    TLS Frame     T           p ee        Mounting Stud    Mounting Studs  4                                                                                                                                                                                __       PCBA      FRONT IOPORT POWER  Spacer    PCBA NO      Location  Heat Sink Flange    T  carace   Heat Sink F
225. sed while an alert message is visible  the display returns to the Top Menu     Dynamic Menus and Menu Items    Dynamic menus and menu items only appear if all the required conditions for the  menu have been configured and satisfied  For example  the Clean Drive Menu only  appears when all conditions are correct  Additionally  the Operation Sequential    menu will only appear when one or more tape drives are configured for Sequential op   eration     The Menu System 501090 Rev  F    Maintenance Menu    The Maintenance menu is used to display detailed information about the TLS and its    operating history  and to test the functionality of the liquid crystal display and menu    control keys  The Maintenance menu is available to the system user and is considered    safe  The user cannot break anything by using  or misusing  this menu  Diagrams    showing the entire structure of the Maintenance menu system are shown in Figure  4 1 and Figure 4 2                                         cr AE Maintenance  LEGEND  Display Log   Display Prevents  1   cartridge location  Display Revision  d   decimal number  Display Stats   x   hexadecimal number  Display Voltage  2   alphanumeric character  Test Inventory  k Test Keyboard    Test LC Display                                                                                                                             Meeeeeeee Display Log M   Display Prevents M   Display Revision Display Stats    Display Initiator 0 Date  mm dd yyyy  Left 
226. sensor circuitry is AC coupled to eliminate its sensitivity to ambient light   The Y Clear sensor serves three purposes     1  When the front door is closed  the Y   Clear sensor verifies that the vertical path  traveled by the handler is unobstructed and that it is therefore safe for the carriage  to move vertically     2 4 Description and Theory of Operation 501090 Rev  F    501090 Rev  F    2  When the front door is open  the Y   Clear sensor determines whether or not the  inventory has been violated by someone reaching inside the cabinet and removing or  inserting a cartridge  Just the presence of someone s hand between the Y   Clear sen   sor   s emitter and detector is sufficient to interrupt the sensor   s infrared beam and  trigger an audible alarm     3  When inserting and removing cartridges  the Y   Clear sensor is used in conjunc   tion with the Cartridge Presence sensor to check the position of a cartridge in the  Handler s Gripper Assembly     e Cartridge Presence Sensors  These sensors  which are mounted on handlers  detect the presence of a  tape cartridge in any storage location  including a tape drive  cartridge  must be in ejected position   They utilize the same modulated circuit as  the Y Clear sensors  The Cartridge Presence sensors also work in conjunc   tion with the Y Clear sensors to determine the position of a cartridge ina  Handler s Gripper Assembly     Digital Sensor Operation  The processor on the Executive PCBAs read the digital signals produce
227. setting passwords     3 3V  dd ddd CLEAR Do  En  Me  ddddd  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO See Section 5 3    HSV dd ddd START    L  dd ddd STOP   Mt TES ELE Display   displays as a right pointing arrow    MDV              Left PORSTUVWAYS M  o displays as a left pointing arrow     3 3V dd ddd abodefghijkimng   displays as yen symbol     5V dd  ddd parstuvwxy2          12V dd ddd              This screen blinks      Figure 4 2 Maintenance Menu  Part 2     NOTE    The menus in this chapter reflect revision 2 24 of the Executive PCBA EPROM software  If a dif     ferent revision of the software is being used  some menu items may not appear in the menus        4 1 Maintenance Menu    Maintenance     Display Log   Display Prevents   Display Revision   Display Stats      Display Voltage     Test Inventory   Test Keyboard   Test LC Display          The Maintenance menu contains multiple Display items  Display items look like the  sub menus found in the Configuration and Operation menus  but they generally do  not contain editable values or executable functions  We prefer to call the Display  items status screens  because they display the present status of various TLS elements     NOTE    Note that the bold menu items are model dependent  Libraries with single bays have a single    SCSI ID sub menu while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models   instead have  SCSI ID LEFTand SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus        4 2 Maintenance Menu 501090 Rev  F    4 2 Maintenance Display Log Menu    Display L
228. step applies to dual bay libraries only  Using the jumpers that were re   moved earlier from the Executive PCBA  attach a jumper to the pins at SA1 for a  left side Executive PCBA and attach jumpers to the pins at both SA1 and SA2 for  a right side Executive PCBA     NOTE    In the next step  the spacers behind the mounting nuts on the PCBA mounting studs come loose    when the nuts are removed        2  Remove all four nuts from the PCBA mounting studs  then make sure that all  four PCBA spacers are in place on the PCBA mounting studs     3  Set the top of the Executive PCBA into the rear panel opening  but do not place  it onto the mounting studs     4  For all single bay libraries Executive PCBAs and the right side PCBA of dual bay  units  press the Front cable firmly into the FRONT connector  until both locking  tabs on the FRONT connector close over the Front cable   s connector     5  Press the I O port cable firmly into the IOPORT connector  until both locking  tabs on the IOPORT connector close over the I O port cable   s connector     6  Ifa ground lug exists  plug in onto the FRAME terminal     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    501090 Rev  F    10     11     12     Plug the Power Cable onto the POWER connector     First  make sure that the remaining cables are not behind the Executive PCBA   and that they have not fallen down inside of the TLS  Next  lift the Executive  PCBA up into the Rear Panel opening  past the mounting studs  Finally  push  the 
229. sts of safety  there are two kinds of warnings used in Qualstar documents  as shown  below     DANGER    PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT IF YOU DO NOT FULLY COMPLY WITH THE  HANDLING  OPERATING  OR SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOUND IN A DANGER    PARAGRAPH        GEFAHR    UNSACHGEMAESSE BENUTZUNG  BEDLENUNG ODER RAPARATUR  AUFGRUND VON NICHTBEGEFAHR DER SICHERHEITSANWEISUNG KANN ZU  VERIET ZUNGEN FUEHREN        CAUTION    EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR LOSS OF DATA may result if you do not fully comply  with the handling  operating  or service instructions found in a CAUTION para   graph        In addition  useful information and tips may be found throughout the document in the  following formats     NOTE    SPECIAL ATTENTION to explanatory statements found in a NOTE paragraph will help you avoid    mistakes and or save time        Introduction 501090 Rev  F    NOTICE    A NOTICE box contains additional important information     1 3 Lithium Battery    Please observe the following information when repairing the unit     DANGER    U9  A DALLAS SEMICONDUCTOR CORPORATION DS1225AB OR A SGS   THOMPSON MICROELECTRONICS M48258X IC ON THE EXECUTIVE PCBA  CONTAINS AN INTEGRAL LITHIUM BATTERY  AN EXPLOSION DANGER EXISTS  IF THE IC IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED  REPLACE THE IC ONLY WITH THE SAME    PART NUMBER  OR AN EQUIVALENT DESIGNATED BY THE MANUFACTURER   DISPOSE OF THE USED IC ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER S  INSTRUCTIONS     GEFAHR    DER U9  EIN DALLAS SEMICONDUCTOR CORPORATION DS1225AB ODER EIN  A SGS THOM
230. sub menus beneath them     The Top Menu is the highest level in the menu hierarchy  Press the MENU key to go  to the top level at any time and from any point within the menu system  When the  Top Menu is displayed  press the EXIT key to exit the menu mode  Figure 3 6 shows  the available menu items in the Top Menu  The line items in menus and sub menus  are organized in alphabetical order     ee a a   a A   gt    cfo n slifalulrfalelifoln            He eeaae steele eseeses      Jofpfefxfale ifojn            tI                  Line 1  Line 2  Line 3  Line 4    Figure 3 6 Top Menu    The Configuration menu contains items that may need to be changed when the TLS is  installed  Once the configuration parameters have been correctly set for a given in   stallation  they are not changed unless something in the system s configuration is  changed  The functions available under the Configuration menu are fully explained in  the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar document  number 501450      NOTE    Be aware that the configuration parameters may also be set by the SCSI interface  A change may    have been caused by the host software        The Maintenance menu is designed to help a qualified repair technician diagnose and  repair the TLS     The Operation menu is designed for the user  and lets the user perform off line tasks  associated with the operation of the TLS  The Operation menu is described in detail in  the TLS 5000 6000 8000 Installation and Opera
231. sults if this process fails     Possible causes     1     2     3     4     An object is preventing a Carriage from reaching the bottom of its travel   The Vertical Axis is jammed  or not running freely   A Carriage cable is damaged  or not properly connected     A Vertical Axis motor is not plugged into the Carriage PCBA  or has failed     6 1 10 When the power is turned on  the alert YHome Fail appears on the con   trol panel display  after the Carriage s  reach the bottom of their vertical  travel     When the power is turned on  the library attempts to drive the carriage s  to the bot   tom of the machine  then verifies that the Y home sensor detect the carriage s   This    error results if this process fails     Possible causes     501090 Rev  F    Troubleshooting 6 5    6 1 11    1  A Vertical Axis Home Sensor has failed    2  A Carriage cable is damaged  or not properly connected    3  A Vertical Axis Home Sensor Probe  see Figure 2 4  is missing or damaged   4  A Vertical Axis motor is not properly connected     5  A Vertical Axis motor has failed     When the power is turned on  the alert loport Jammed appears on the  control panel display  and you do not hear a whining sound for several  seconds before the alert occurs     During the power up sequence  the I O port is driven back to its home position  If the  motor is operating but the I O port is not moving  it will make a loud buzzing sound   Failure to make this noise indicates one of the following causes     1  
232. t and the library needs to be recalibrated     A Cartridge Presence sensor is obscured  by a foreign object  or by dust on the  optics     A Cartridge Presence sensor has malfunctioned     If the target is a tape drive  the cartridge is stuck in the drive     During operation  the alert Handler Jammed appears on the control  panel display  and a cartridge is in a gripper     This is typically the result of the library attempting to insert a cartridge into a storage    location or tape drive  and failing     Possible causes     1     2     The target magazine is not fully seated    The target magazine is damaged    The target is a tape drive  which has a tape in it already    A cartridge present sensor has become dirty or failed    The retaining spring in the I O port has broken off    The library is configured for the wrong TLS model    If the location is a tape drive  the drive is configured to the wrong type     The calibration data is corrupt and the library needs to be recalibrated     Troubleshooting 501090 Rev  F    9     The Insertion Axis is binding near the magazine end of its travel     6 2 8 During operation  the alert Handler Jammed appears on the control  panel display     Possible causes     1     2     An Insertion Axis is binding    An Insertion Axis is jammed against a stop    An Insertion Axis motor is unplugged    If the location is a tape drive  the drive is configured to the wrong type   The right Insertion Axis has a tape jammed against the I O Slot     
233. t on the I O port  PCBA has failed     7  The emitters or detectors have dust or debris on their lenses     8  The unit is not configured for an I O port  I O Port in the Configura   tion Handler Mechanics menu is set to NONE   However  an I O port is  installed and the I O port slot is not fully retracted  which blocks the Inventory  Sensor beam  Solution  Manually turn the I O port   s leadscrew to position the I O       port slot at its back stop     6 3 2 During Calibration  the alert Crtprs Sensor Fail appears on the control  panel display     501090 Rev  F    The calibration sequence blocks and unblocks the path of the CRTPRS light beams   and reads the sensor output level to determine proper operation  and to calculate a  threshold for detecting a blocked condition  This fault indicates that a sensor or emit   ter is not functioning correctly     Possible causes     1  A Cartridge Presence Sensor s emitter or detector is not properly connected   There are small connectors on the PCBA on the bottom of each carriage that  carry the signals to the emitter and detector  These may come unplugged during  service or other activities     Troubleshooting 6 15    2  A Cartridge Presence Sensor s emitter or detector has failed   3  There is an object blocking a Cartridge Presence Sensor s optical path   4  A Cartridge Presence Sensor s emitter or detector has dust or debris on its lens     5  An optical emitter and detector may have become misaligned  Normally any  alignment poss
234. t or     DOS box     This program will perform a SCSI Inquiry operation on Ids  0 15    Luns  0 15  and Hosts  0 15   If a device is found  it will display the general in   formation obtained from the inquiry response     Example of scanscsi execution and response      gt scanscsi           Firmware Updating 8 3    Id Lun Host Device Type Vendor Product Revision          0  O  I Medium changer QUALSTAR TLS 68120 2091  Ds  0  1 Sequential access QUANTUM DLT8000 2255  27 0  i Sequential access QUANTUM DLT8000 22 55          In this example  the SCSI bus scan found three devices  The first device is a  Qualstar TLS 68120  followed by two Quantum Tape Drives     NOTE    Upload exe will not work if the Id is greater than 15  or the Lun is greater than 7 when updating    the firmware in a fibre channel environment        5  The upload console program is executed from a Windows command prompt or     DOS box     The program   s command syntax is as follows     Upload Id  Lun  Host   f  lt filename gt     Command Parameters     Id Lun Host   TLS Library SCSI address  This address can be found using the  scanscsi utility program  The default Id  Lun and Host is 0     Filename   Filename of the new firmware update  This file is provided by Qual   star Technical Support     Upload program example     6  Update the TLS Library with firmware file 700105c 209  The scanscsi pro   gram was used to locate the TLS Library is on SCSI Address   Id 0  Lun 0  and  Host 1  Note that the firmware fil
235. te  DriveBay   Bay    P DriveBay   Bay Left  Address  XX  Type  XX   Revision  ddd   Temperature ddd   PAVE ddd   5Ve ddd          e Address    This value indicates the I2C bus address  On dual bay libraries  0 is for the left side    and 1 for the right side     e Type  This value indicates the type of communications protocol used by the DriveBay  board  The current value is 01     e Revision  This value indicates the revision of the DriveBay firmware and ranges from 1 to  255     e Temperature  This feature is not implemented     e 12V  Divide this value by 17 1 to determine the approximate value of the 12V power  supply for the tape drives     e 5V    Divide this value by 34 1 to determine the approximate value of the 5V power sup     ply for the tape drives     5 4 15 The Private Executive Menu    501090 Rev  F       Privat     Left  Firmware        I2C Address   PCB Number  501  7  PCB Revision          In a dual bay library this menu initially displays information for the right side execu        tive board  The left side menu is visible by selecting   LEFT and pressing the ENTER  key  Single bay libraries will simply display the information for the single executive  board     e Firmware  Indicates the current revision of the Executive firmware     e J2C Address  The address of the Executive PCBA on the I2C bus     e PCB Number  The part number of the Executive PCBA     The Private Menu 5 27    e PCB Revision  The major revision letter of the Executive PCBA  A  B  C  etc
236. teps  dddddddddd  MDLD Right      Entry Initiator R1 Z Moves   dddddddddd  At  ddddddddd ddddd Initiator R2 Z Steps  dddddddddd  BDC  ORF Initiator R3  Clean x ORE Initiator R4  Configuration  OFF Initiator R5  DriveBay  OnE Initiator R6  Executive  OFF Initiator R7  FC Events  OEE Initiator R8  oo    Initiator R9 Note that the bold menu items are model dependent   12c  OFF SERE Libraries with single bays have a single SCSI ID sub menu  Inventory  OFF Initiator R12 while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models    e N Initiator R13 instead have SCSI ID LEFT and SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus     Initiator R14  RBT Client  OFF Initiator R15  RBT Events  OFF  RBT I O Port  OFF  RBT Machines  OFF  RBT Operations OFF  RBT States  OFF  SCSI Commands  ON  SCSI Interrupt OFF  SCSI Phases  OFF  SCSI States  OFF  Sequential  OFF  LOCK          Continued in Figure 4 2  Figure 4 1 Maintenance Menu  Part 1     501090 Rev  F Maintenance Menu    Continued from Figure 4 1    Note that the bold menu items are model dependent   Libraries with single bays have a single SCSI ID sub menu  while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models   in   stead have SCSI ID LEFT and SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus              Private                               M      Display Voltage Meer  Test Inventory Meerse Test Keyboard M    Test LC Display    Left   Cartridges  ddddd ENTER  amp  EXIT to exit 1   38          O Private menu access    Right   Labels  ddddda Up  Ex  Re  0123456789   lt   gt   O for 
237. terface  SCSI or  optional Fibre Channel   the Q Conn RS 232 interface  using XMODEM file transfer   or the optional Q Link Web Interface  The Q Link Web Interface firmware can only be  uploaded through its LAN or Internet connection     Models TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx are referred to as dual bay libraries because of  their dual tape drive bays  These libraries have two executive boards with identical  firmware in each board  All other models are single bay libraries  which contain one  executive board     NOTE    Firmware should only be updated after consulting with Qualstar   s Technical Support Depart   ment  They can be reached at 805 583 7744 or E mail them at support qualstar com    501137 01 2 700105  Executive III 501387 01 3 700105  501447 01 5 700115       Table 8 1 Boards Containing Updateable Firmware    Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver   Flash Memory IC Replacement only     e Flat Blade Screwdriver   Flash Memory IC Replacement only     8 2 Determining the Installed Hardware and Required Firmware    501090 Rev  F    1  The Executive PCBAs type can be determined by removing the service panel  from the rear of the library and reading the part number printed on the Execu   tive PCBA  There are two such panels on the TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx mod   els  Follow steps 2 through 4     Firmware Updating 8 1    Do not remove  these screws    Remove power from the TLS  first turn the power switch off and then remove the  power cord     Remove the six P
238. th  the PCBA Mounting Studs  Figure 7 49      7 74 Field Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    NOTE    In the next step  only finger tighten the nuts  The PCBA needs to be loosely held to the PCBA    Mounting Studs        Access Holes  4     Install a washer by hand or with long nose pliers onto a PCBA Mounting Stud    then with a 1 4 inch nutdriver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  thread PCBA  Mounting Nuts onto the PCBA Mounting Studs  Reinstall the remaining PCBA  Mounting screws the same way  Figure 7 49      Nutdriver    Tape Drive  Assemblies       Figure 7 53 82xx Series Drive Bay PCBA with Tape Drive Assemblies    501090 Rev  F    Install two tape drive assemblies into the TLS being careful to align the Tape  Drive Connector   s on the Drive Bay PCBA with the mating connector   s on the  tape drive assemblies  It may be necessary to move the Drive Bay PCBA to prop   erly align the connectors  Figure 7 53   Refer to Chapter 5 in the Installation and  Operation Manual  Qualstar document number 501450  for more information on  tape drive assembly installation     Confirm that the Tape Drive Connector   s on both tape drive assemblies are fully  inserted into the mating connectors on the on the Drive Bay PCBA     With a 1 4 inch nutdriver  a magnetic nutdriver works best  reach through the  four access holes in the rear of the TLS and tighten the PCBA Mounting Nuts  onto the PCBA Mounting Studs  Figure 7 53      Remove the tape drive assemblies from the TLS     Acces
239. that the cable is not twisted  and that the  colored stripe aligns with the right side of the TLS when viewed from the front   Press the connector in firmly  until both locking tabs on the FRONT connector  close over the Switch Bracket Ribbon Cable   s connector     Insert a Nylon Cable Tie in through both holes in the Switch Bracket Assembly   just above the LCD  Figure 7 32      Position a second Nylon Cable Tie over the Switch Bracket Ribbon Cable  then  attach it to both ends of the Nylon Cable Tie in the Switch Bracket Assembly   Figure 7 32      Tighten the Nylon Cable Ties  without crimping the cable  until they secure the  Switch Bracket Ribbon Cable to the Switch Bracket Assembly     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    5  Trim off the excess length of plastic from each Nylon Cable Tie     6  Starting behind the LCD  position one Nylon Cable Tie behind the Switch  Bracket Ribbon Cable and the Display Cable  then position a second Nylon Cable  Tie over the both cables  and attach the cable ties to each other  Figure 7 32      7  Tighten the cable ties  without crimping the cables  until they secure the Switch  Bracket Ribbon Cable to the Display Cable     8  Trim off the excess length of plastic from each Nylon Cable Tie     9  Starting above where the Display Cable connects to the PCBA  position one Ny   lon Cable Tie behind the Switch Bracket Ribbon Cable and the Display Cable   Next position a second Nylon Cable Tie over the both cables  and attach the
240. the ENTER key once to enter the  Configuration menu     e e    eeConfiguration  Advanced  Drive  SCSI ID    gt   Security  SET TO DEFAULTS                   4  Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Security     5  Press the ENTER key to enter the C Security menu     CeeeeeeeeeesSecurity  Configuration  ON    Inventory  ON  Master  ON       6  Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Master    7  Press the ENTER key once to begin editing the Master value    8  Use the V  DOWN  key to change the Master value from ON to OFF   9  Press the MENU key twice to leave the menu system     10  Close the cabinet door     5 3 Enabling the Private Menu    NOTE    Not all items shown in the menu illustrations appear at all times     Note that the bold menu items are model dependent  Libraries with single bays have a single  SCSI ID sub menu while libraries with dual bays  58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models   instead have  SCSI ID LEFTand SCSI ID RIGHT sub menus        5 3 1 Access    Access is a text string used to set a password  which will unlock the  Private  menu  It is easy to find out if a password is currently set  Just press the MENU key to  display the Top Menu  then use the V  DOWN  key to scroll down through all of the  menu items  If Private is visible in the menu  then a password exists     5 4 The Private Menu 501090 Rev  F    Service is the password used by qualified service personnel to access  certain  Private menu items while servicing the TLS  Please note that  only the fi
241. the Location value     13  Enter A01  1A01 for carousel units  as the Location value   If you are unfamiliar with the value editing process  refer to the Editing Values  section of Chapter 6 in the Installation and Operation Manual  Qualstar Docu   ment number 501450      14  Press the EXIT key to stop editing the Location value     15  Use the V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Primary Tag        16  Verify that the Primary Tag value is set to YES     17  Verify that the Tag value  immediately below the Primary Tag value  is the  same as the label on the tape  If the Tag value is incorrect  try changing the La   belCheckChar value in the Configuration Handler menu to its other  option  YES or NO   then repeating this step        18  Press the MENU key  then press the EXIT key to exit the menu system     9 16 TLS Expansions 501090 Rev  F    
242. the SCSI Bus   1  Press the MENU key to open the Top Menu     2  Use the VW  DOWN  key to move the pointer to Private  then press the ENTER  key to open the Private menu        3  Use V  DOWN  key to move the pointer to RESET SCSI BUS              4  Press the ENTER key to execute the RESET SCSI BUS command     NOTE    The RESET SCSI BUS command is locked by both the Master Security Lock and the Inventory  Lock  If the user gets a SECURITY message  the user must first unlock the security locks before    proceeding  Follow the procedure in section 5 2 to enter the Security menu and disable the  Master Security Lock  The user can also disable the Inventory Lock while the Security menu is  displayed        The Private Blower Menu    Address   Type   Revision  ddd    Updates  dddddddddd  Oper Properly  YES  Up To Speed  YES  Speed  ddd  Volts 24  ddd          The Blower menu displays information about the blower and it   s performance   The Blower menu contains the following values     e Address  This address of the blower on the I2C bus     e Type  This value describes the type of blower installed in the library  Currently there is  only one type of blower available     e Revision  Indicates the current revision of the blower firmware   e Updates    This number is a tabulation of the amount of times the blowers PCBA has contacted  the Executive PCBA to check for updated information about the library     e Oper  Properly  YES NO   This value shows whether or not the blower is ope
243. them se   curely with a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  See Figure 7 72     10  Insert the Blower Guard Screen through the front opening of the library and  align it   s six mounting screw holes with the six mounting tabs located between  the drive bays  Use a Phillips screwdriver to reinstall all six screws that were  removed earlier     Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    11  Ifthe left side Carousel Motor is being replaced  replace the left Side Panel  Sec   tion 7 4 4      12  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 20 SCSI High Voltage Differential Adapter PCBA  P N 501407 01 1    Single bay libraries contain one Executive PCBA     TLS 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain two Executive PCBAs  A SCSI  HVD Adapter PCBA may be attached to one or both of these Executive PCBAs  If  there is one attached to each Executive board  they are referred to as the left and  right HVD Adapter PCBAs when viewed from the front of the TLS     Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    z5 mes gJ  lt q    Rear Service Panel          Mounting       Screws  6           Left Side  HVD Adapter PCBA is  behind this Service Panel    Right Side             _ i  HVD Adapter PCBA is j g  behind this Service Panel j                                                                         wo    r  wo  o o                Single Bay Library Dual Bay Library    Figure 7 76 Rear View of Service Panels    501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 99    7 20 1 S
244. tion Manual  Qualstar document  number 501450      3 5 Displaying the TLS Firmware Revision    501090 Rev  F    The revision of the changer   s firmware may be displayed by using the Maintenance  menu  Press the MENU key to display the Top Menu  Press the V  DOWN  key until  the arrow on the left side of the display points to MAINTENANCE  then press the EN   TER key  Again  press the V  DOWN  key until the arrow on the left side of the dis   play points to the Display Revision sub menu  Press the ENTER key to view the                Date  Part Number  Revision  Checksum and Id of the changer   s installed firmware     The Menu System 3 11    3 6    Alerts    Alerts are important messages  which take over the entire display and remain visible  until dismissed by the operator  If the alert message is longer than four lines  a down  arrow in the lower right corner indicates more text is visible by scrolling the display  with the V  DOWN  key  The top line of an alert is always displayed in upper case let   ters and is centered with bullets filling out the line  Example     e     sjolvje   clalr t R z p ele       ed it nt i   a       tiple   a  efs t ifa  a t ijola   als     ee a       Figure 3 7 Alert Example    3 7    3 12    Alerts can always be dismissed by pressing the EXIT key  When the EXIT key is  pressed while an alert message is visible  the unit returns to the state it was in before  the alert  The MENU key can also be used to dismiss alerts  When the MENU key is  pres
245. unting holes in the Carriage Cable Clamp   Figure 7 6   then firmly tighten the screws with a 7 64 inch Allen wrench     31  Continue with Section 7 5 3 to lubricate the Leadscrew and recalibrate the unit     Lubricating the Vertical  Y  Axis Leadscrew    The Vertical  Y  Axis Leadscrew requires re lubrication every two years  or after ap    proximately 200 000 Y Axis moves  whichever comes first   or whenever the Carriage  Assembly  P N 501196 01 8  is changed  The number of Y Axis moves is displayed in  the Maintenance Display Stats  status screen  see Section 4 6      IMPORTANT   Use only Qualstar Leadscrew Lubricant  part number 732 0003 2  for this procedure     NOTE    The white lubricant used for this procedure is non toxic  it is used in food processing equip     ment   but it is still wise to use a latex glove on the hand that applies the lubricant  If the lubri   cant contacts your skin  wash with soap and water        1  Usea single  0 3   inch cube of Qualstar Leadscrew Lubricant     Apply the lubricant to the tip of your index finger  then rub your thumb and in   dex finger together to spread the lubricant evenly on your fingertips     2  Run your thumb and index finger over the length of the Leadscrew several  times  at different angles  to apply the grease to as much of the Leadscrew s sur   face as possible  Each thread should receive a small amount of grease     3  Remove the latex glove  If you did not use a latex glove  wash you hands thor   oughly with soa
246. upporting Guide Shaft up and out of the TLS  Figure 7 9      CAUTION    Be very careful not to damage the Vertical  Y  Axis Home Sensor on the Vertical    Axis Home Sensor Probe  Figure 7 4  when you move the Carriage Assembly        17  Hold the Carriage Assembly with the left hand  Failure to do so will cause the  Carriage Assembly to tip over after the shaft is removed  possibly damaging the  Vertical  Y  Axis Home Sensor  Lift the front Guide Shaft far enough to clear the  Carriage Assembly  Gently lift the Carriage Assembly and remove it from the  cabinet  then lower the front Guide Shaft down onto the bottom plate     18  Slowly lift the front Guide Shaft up and out of the TLS  Be sure to put the or   ange rubber bushing  located at the bottom of the Guide Shaft  in a safe place  It  must be reinstalled before the Guide Shaft is reinstalled     19  For dual bay models only  use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the Supporting  Guide Shaft Bearing Assembly Screws  Remove the Supporting Guide Shaft  Bearing Assembly from the Carriage Assembly and place it in a safe location  It  will need to be installed on the new Carriage Assembly     Supporting Guide Shaft Bearing Assembly Rear Guide Shaft Bearing   Only on Dual Bay TLS 58xxx 68xxx 88xxx models            Carriage Cable Clamp                                     Vertical  Y  Axis  Leadscrew Motor Nut          Supporting Guide Shaft 7 A  Bearing Assembly Screws  2    TR Front Guide Shaft Bearing  Insertion Axis Motor    F
247. urce  with the TLS power cable and SCSI interface cables being the only  required connections  The entire cabinet is pressurized and cooled by filtered air to  ensure an optimum operating environment     These tape libraries are not intended for use in mobile applications  They were de     signed for use in an office environment     2 2 1 Motion Systems    The TLS contains up to five independent motion systems     e Carriages move up and down vertically along the Vertical  Y  Axis and are  driven by brushless DC motors  which turn a nut around a fixed  precision  leadscrew     501090 Rev  F Description and Theory of Operation 2 3    e Handler assemblies extend and retract along the Insertion  Z  Axis and  are driven by brushless DC motors that turn precision leadscrews     e The I O port slot extends to receive or deliver a cartridge and then re   tracts  The I O port slot s leadscrew is driven by a DC stepper motor     e Alarge gear at the bottom of each Carousel Assembly is turned by a pinion  gear on a DC stepper motor     e On dual bay libraries  models 58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx  the Shuttle travels  along the Horizontal  X  Axis to allow for the transferring on single car   tridges between the left and right sides  It is driven by a brushless DC mo   tor that turns a leadscrew     The drive circuitry for all motion systems is located on the Executive Printed Circuit  Board Assemblies  PCBAs   Each of the brushless DC motors has three internal Hall   Effect sensors  The Hall
248. usel Pivot Support down through the top of the TLS onto  the Upper Carousel Pivot  Figure 7 70      Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 93    7  Align the mounting screw holes in the Upper Carousel Pivot Support with the  mounting screw holes in the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to  install all three Upper Carousel Pivot Support mounting screws  Figure 7 69      8  Follow the procedure in section 7 10 2 to replace the I O port assembly     9  For each Magazine Anchor that was removed on 54xx  64xx and 84xx models   use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the two Receiver Mounting  Screws  Position a Magazine Anchor at the bottom of the receiver and align the  mounting screw holes  Insert the two Receiver Mounting Screws through the  Magazine Anchor and tighten them securely with a number 2 Phillips screw   driver  See Figure 7 68     10  Replace the left Side Panel on 62xx and 82x models  Section 7 4 4      11  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 19 3 Dual Bay Carousel Motor Removal   58xxx  68xxx and 88xxx Libraries     1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord     2  Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen all four of the quarter turn fasteners on  the access cover on the side where the Carousel Motor is being removed  Figure  7 59   Carefully remove the access cover     3  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      4  If removing the left side Carousel Motor  remove the left Side Panel  Section  7 4 3  then remove the top most Tape Driv
249. usel turns  then stops and makes a loud noise     When the power is turned on in a library  one of the things that happen is that carou   sels attempt to home themselves  This means that carousels attempt to find the small  slots in their gear guard using the opto sensors on the carousel PCBA  and align  themselves with one of these slots  They count the number of stepper motor steps be   tween the slots  to verify proper operation  Any problem in this process results in this  alert  If the library makes a loud buzzing noise during this process  this indicates that  a Carousel motor is being driven  but the carousel is not free to rotate  or the motor is  not operating properly     Possible causes     501090 Rev  F Troubleshooting    1  A Carousel is jammed  or binding and does not turn freely  generally caused by a  cartridge not fully inserted in a magazine or storage slot  Also may be caused by  a magazine not properly installed on its mount     2  The Cable from an Executive PCBA to the Carousel PCBA is damaged  or not  properly seated     3  A Carousel motor cable is not properly seated in the Carousel PCBA   4  The internal SCSI cable is caught on a Carousel     5  A Carousels drive gears are damaged or binding on debris     6 1 16 When the power is turned on  the Carousel turns for awhile  then the    alert XHome Fail appears on the control panel display     When the power is turned on in a library  one of the things that happen is that carou   sels attempt to home the
250. ut in Step 8 of Section 7 8 4 1    8  Insert the Fan Assembly into the TLS through the front opening  with the red  and black wires pointing down    9  Fully insert the end of the red wire into the Butt Splice that is attached to the  red wire of the Fan Assembly  Use a wire crimper to secure the wire in the Butt  Splice  See Figure 7 19    10  Repeat step 9 for the black wire    11  Align the Fan Assembly s mounting screw holes with the mounting screw holes  in the TLS and then install the Fan Assembly mounting screws  Thread the nuts  on to the mounting screws and then tighten the Fan Assembly mounting screws   See Figure 7 21    12  Replace any cable ties and or cable wraps that were removed when accessing the  Fan Assemblies wires    13  Reinstall the air filter  or install a new one   If an old air filter is being rein   stalled  make sure that the side that was facing the inside of the library is placed  in the same direction as it was when it was removed  Reversing the direction of  an old air filter may cause dirt to be transferred into the library    14  Replace the Air Filter Clamp and secure it by turning the quarter turn fastener  clockwise  Figure 7 16     15  Reinstall the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4   then reinstall the Top Panel   Section 7 4 2     Rear Fan   1  Measure the length of the red and black wires that are attached to the Fan As   sembly that was removed in Section 7 8 4 2    2  Adda minimum of one inch to the length measured in Step 1  This is t
251. utomatic key repeat feature by holding down either the  A  UP  or the V  DOWN  key     The system will never allow making any value invalid  The choice for each digit is lim        ited to valid values  For example  valid values for the CAS LEFT Initiators or  CAS RIGHT Initiators range from 0 to 15  The range of some valid values may  change with a system s particular configuration     3 3 4 4 Editing Alphanumeric Values    501090 Rev  F    Either the A  UP  or the V  DOWN  keys can be used to edit alphanumeric characters  one at a time  There are no carries or borrows to other characters  The choice for each  particular character will be limited to valid characters  which vary with the item and  the character   s position within it     The following table shows the available alphanumeric characters  A N  and their  hexadecimal  hex  equivalents  The characters occur in the order shown in the table   starting with the    space    character  followed by the    A    character and ending with the    character  The hex equivalents are those values sent over the SCSI interface in  response to SCSI commands     The Menu System 3 9    LEN hex JAN hex f AN   hor  aN   hor  a f hor f AN f hor f AN hor f AN f er    ECOLOEAEANELIKEEIENEI EE    Table 3 4 Alphanumeric Hex Equivalents       3 3 4 5 Editing Cartridge Location Values    There are two ways to edit cartridge location values with either the A  UP  or the   YV  DOWN  key  First  like an alpha numeric value  a cartridge location
252. wer Supply  Section 7 15 2    10  Replace the right Side Panel  Section 7 4 4      11  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 71    7 17 3 Drive Bay PCBA Removal 62xx and 82xx Models    Nuts and Washers  6     Nutdriver SG    Drive Bay Openings  Access Holes  4     Drive Bay PCBA       Tape Drive Connectors  2     Figure 7 49 82xx Series Drive Bay PCBA    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord    2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1     3  Remove the right Side Panel  as seen from the front of the TLS  Section 7 4 3    4  Remove tape drive assemblies  if installed in the TLS    5  Remove the Tape Drive Power Supply  Section 7 15 1     6  Disconnect all the cables from the Drive Bay PCBA  Figure 7 49      7  Using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver remove the three support bracket mount   ing screws from the rear of the TLS  and then remove the bracket  Figure 7 50      NOTE    In the next step  the nuts on the cable holders may drop into the cabinet when the screws are    removed        8  Using a number 2 Phillips screwdriver  remove the two cable holder mounting  screws from the rear of the TLS  Figure 7 50      7 72 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    Cable Holder Screws  2        Support Bracket Screws  3     Cable Holder Nut  2   Cable       Cable Tie  Pa    Support Bracket Screws  3     Cable Holder  2          Support Bracket    o       Cable Holder Screws  2  Rear of TLS    Sectional View fr
253. wer Supply  then install all four  Screen mounting screws  Figure 7 38   Make sure that neither power cable is  pinched by the Screen     5  This step only applies if the right side Handler Power Supply was removed  Re   connect the Switch Bracket  FRONT  Cable and the I OPORT Cable to the Ex   ecutive PCBA  Figure 7 42   Make sure that the connectors are fully inserted   until the locking tabs of the mating connectors are fully closed  Slide the cables  under the three clips on the inside rear of the TLS     6  This step only applies if the right side Handler Power Supply was removed   Place the Rear Service Panel onto the TLS  then use a number 2 Phillips screw   driver to reinstall all six Rear Service Panel mounting screws  Figure 7 37      7  This step only applies if the left side Handler Power Supply was removed  Posi   tion the Y clear detector cable as seen in Figure 7 37 and slide it under the clips   If a clip is too tight use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw at   tached to the clip and retighten it after the cable is in place     8  Replace the Top Panel  Section 7 4 2      7 54 Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  501090 Rev  F    7 14 Blower Power Supply    DANGER    TO AVOID THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY  ALWAYS WAIT ABOUT ONE  MINUTE AFTER THE POWER IS TURNED OFF AND THE POWER CORD IS    DISCONNECTED  BEFORE TOUCHING THE BLOWER POWER SUPPLY OR THE  TAPE DRIVE POWER SUPPLY        GEFAHR    UM VERLETZUNGEN ZU VERHINDERN WARTEN SIE BITTE 1 MINUTE  NA
254. x and 88xxx  dual bay  models contain four Tape Drive Power Sup   plies  Two are located on the left side of the library and two are on the right side  Note  that the four power supplies provide power to the drive bays as shown in Figure 7 40  as seen from the front of the library  The supply on the top right side provides power  to drive bays R T1 and R T2 while the supply below it provides the power to bays R T3  and R T4  The left side supplies are the opposite of this configuration with the top  supply powering bays L T3 and L T4 while the bottom supply provides power to bays  L T1 and L T2     501090 Rev  F Field   Replaceable Units  FRUs  7 57    Left Right                                                                                                                                                                                  Side Side  Top Tape Drive L T1 Top Tape Drive  Power Supply Power Supply  L T2  Bottom Tape Drive L T3 l R T3 Bottom Tape Drive  Power Supply Power Supply  L T4 R T4  J       Drive Bays    Figure 7 40 Relationship of the Drive Bays to the Tape Drive Power Supplies  Note that the power supplies in single bay libraries may be a different P N than the  ones in dual bay libraries and are not interchangeable   Tools Required     e Number 2 Phillips Screwdriver    7 15 1 Tape Drive Power Supply Removal    1  Turn off the TLS power and remove the power cord   2  Remove the Top Panel  Section 7 4 1      3  On single bay libraries remove the right Side
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Samsung Spinpoint M HN-M160MBB hard disk drive  Prospera PL017 massager  Nespresso A-GCA1-US-BK-NE Coffeemaker User Manual  E X P L O R E R XM  DA600 User`s Manual  CC-1104-05 manual usuario coc  50 Gallon Skid Sprayer  Cours primitive.  APC AR8450 rack accessory  Massive Suspension light 37626/75/10    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file